JP6394377B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this manner, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states.

Japanese Patent No. 5536601 Japanese Patent No. 5572745

  However, since there are many such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that can realize further innovative gaming properties.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
When a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, the V prize entry ball detection device C22s), a second special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50),
Game information transmission means (for example, game information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary game unit side;
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device, for example) according to the determination content based on a second random number related to a certain second hold. When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), it is configured that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner after the variability display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the executed variable winning opening releasing game is executed. The entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning entry entrance detection device C22s) is configured to be substantially definite,
Under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) continues, the second special game is newly executed during the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained. Until the predetermined number is reached, a new second hold can be generated before the game ball is continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20). Even under circumstances, during the period in which the normal gaming state is maintained, the new second hold is configured to be impossible or extremely difficult to occur,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
During the execution of a certain second special game, a first effect is executed in which a specific game state or a normal game state is notified after the execution of the certain second special game, and then the certain second special game is executed. If the second special game is executed due to the fulfillment of the variable display start condition of the second identification information relating to the second hold remaining during the execution of the second special During the execution of the game, it is possible to execute a second effect for notifying whether the specific game state or the normal game state is to be performed after the execution of the further second special game. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the effect display contents of the second effect are the effect display contents constituting a series of stories.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in the gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an operation diagram relating to the second big prize opening of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an operation diagram relating to the electric accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the distribution accessory control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a right-handed instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the remaining short time display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the time-short / middle-right instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the special game executing effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is an image diagram related to special game effects in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the right-handed instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game effect display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of processing after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a table configuration diagram of the auxiliary game side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the sixth embodiment pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of hold information management / hold display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of auxiliary game sub-game display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a configuration diagram of a subsidiary game table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of auxiliary game sub game content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of auxiliary game sub-game display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the hold information prior determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the sub game display area size change control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

  Prior to detailed description of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, a simple configuration according to the present invention will be described.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to this example, the probability of winning a small hit for the second main game is set to a high probability, and during the small hit game, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the V winning opening almost certainly, A configuration for determining the game state after the end of the special game related to the small hit based on the game state at the time of winning the small hit related to the second main game will be described in detail in this embodiment.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to this example, the configuration of (this embodiment) is such that the number of time reductions given after the end of the special game may differ depending on the jackpot symbol, and whether the jackpot symbol is the first main gaming symbol A configuration that is changed so as to make the expected value of the number of short times given depending on whether the game is a two-main game symbol will be described in detail in (Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to this example, from the configuration of this embodiment, when winning a small hit in the time-reduced gaming state, the player once fires a game ball (right-handed) ) Is stopped, and when a game ball is inserted into the V prize opening, a configuration that is changed so that the number of short hours given can be notified will be described in detail in (Modification 2 from this embodiment). .

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, when the transition to the time-reduced game state is made after the end of the special game related to any second main game hold, the second main game hold occurs again up to the upper limit number, and the game A configuration for executing a seamless effect during a period in which a ball is continuously given to a person will be described in detail in (Second Embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to this example, when a big hit is made (the big hit symbol has stopped, or a game ball has entered the V prize opening), the game ball is then entered at a certain entrance. Thus, the configuration in which the special game starts will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the second embodiment).

  Of the pachinko gaming machines according to this example, the limited frequency table that can be referred to after the end of the special game and that is referred based on the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol stopped immediately before the execution of the special game is determined. A configuration in which the number of times that the second main game hold can be generated varies depending on the variation time of the second main game symbol will be described in detail in (third embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to this example, a configuration realized by making the same configuration as in the (third embodiment) by making the variation mode determination table referred to by the number of reservations different without using the limited frequency ( This will be described in detail in Modification 1) from the third embodiment.

  Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present example, a configuration having one second-type non-electrically-powered object will be described in detail in (Fourth embodiment).

  Of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, a configuration having two second-type non-electrically-powered objects will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to this example, a configuration in which no V winning opening is provided and a probability variation gaming state exists will be described in detail in (Fifth Embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present example, there are two auxiliary game start ports, and in the non-time-reduced game state, the second main game start port electric combination can be opened long (sixth embodiment) ) To explain in detail.

  Of the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, a configuration capable of executing parallel lottery will be described in detail in (Seventh embodiment).

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects corresponding to the gaming state and the like are output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start opening B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state (however, The second main game start port electric accessory B11d in the present embodiment is different from the known tulip type, and will be described in detail later.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart, and the game ball flows down the left side of the game region D30 (based on the center of the game region). However, a game ball that is easy to be guided to the first main game start opening A10 but is difficult to be guided to the second main game start opening B10 and flows down to the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is the first main game. While being difficult to be guided to the starting port A10, it is configured to be easily guided to the second main game starting port B10. It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start opening H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided {but is not limited to this, and it is configured so that a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right of the game area D30, respectively)}.

  Next, a first big prize opening C10 is arranged above the out mouth D36, and a second big prize opening C20 is arranged at the upper right of the out mouth D36, and the right side of the gaming area D30 (in the middle of the gaming area). The game balls flowing down the reference) are configured to easily pass through the area where the first grand prize winning opening C10 and the second big winning prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

  Next, the first big winning opening C10 is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is in a horizontal rectangular shape and is located above the out opening D36 and below the second large winning opening C20. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the first big prize opening electric accessory C11d is a flat member, and substantially affects the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area D30 so as to close the first big prize opening C10. The normal state is closed without giving a bonus to the player side in such a way that the first big prize opening C10 is opened and the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area D30 is changed toward the opening. The tilting state becomes the open state (that is, the so-called general attacker mode).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the small hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is in the state, located at the upper right of the out opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). To the V winning opening C22 and the V winning opening C22 which are the triggers for executing a special game described later (in this embodiment, a game in which the first big winning opening C10 is opened). The V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s, which is a sensor for detecting the entering of the game balls of the player, and the gaming balls that have entered the second large winning opening C20 are directly discharged out of the second large winning opening C20 or the V winning opening And a sorting tool C23 for sorting whether to be guided to C22 once. Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Variable (exciting and changing the second big prize opening solenoid C24). In the present embodiment, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is a flat member like the first big prize opening electric combination C11d, but the variable form of the first big prize opening electric combination C11d. Unlike the game board, the game board (game area D30) is changed in the vertical direction. In other words, the second grand prize opening electrical accessory C21d is substantially completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a retracted state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). A state of projecting toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) is taken until the board D16 comes close. The second prize-winning electrical accessory C21d protrudes from the game board (game area D30) and can receive a game ball flowing down the game area D30. The box-shaped member C20-1 (the game that has entered the box-shaped member). When the ball serves as a lid for the second big prize opening C20), that is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d takes a retracted state, the box-like member C20-1 (extends) While the game ball can enter the second grand prize opening C20), when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d takes the advanced state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (and the second The game ball is not allowed to enter the inside of the big prize opening C20 (this box-shaped member is in a substantially sealed state). Then, whether the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is directly discharged out of the second big prize opening C20 by the sorting role C23 or is once guided to the V prize opening C22. It is configured to be distributed.

  Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning opening C22 and plays an effect by turning on or the like (the effect of notifying the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C22).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  The above is the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. Prior to the description of the characteristic part of this embodiment, the contents of the game developed on this gaming board will be outlined. First, a game ball launched toward the game area D30 flows down a flow-down route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a left-handed route) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the game area center), The flow down (which may be referred to as the right-handed route hereinafter) formed on the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is divided into two. Here, the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route can have an opportunity to enter the first main game starting port A10 or the first major winning port C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is an auxiliary Opportunities to enter the game starting port H10, the second grand prize winning port C20, the second main game starting port B10, and the first major winning port C10 are obtained. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to enter the first big prize opening C10 more easily than the game ball that has flowed down the left-handed route (" “Easy” and “difficult to enter” are determined by, for example, the magnitude of the number of entered balls when launching 10,000 game balls on the right-handed route and the left-handed route, respectively.

  On the left-hand route (not shown), the game ball is guided or not guided toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. However, the number of game nails and windmills is smaller on the right-handed route (although not shown) than the left-handed route, and the game ball has a substantially uniform flow-down manner. take.

  More specifically, with respect to the right-handed route, first, a game ball launched aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launching intensity of the game ball by the launching device is maximum, also called right-handed) is Falling by its own weight by flying inside the game area D30 along the outer rail D32 and colliding with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 Begin. Next, the fallen game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 immediately below it with a high probability, and then the flow path width exceeds one game ball and less than two game balls. The ball is collected to D50 (the ball is collected regardless of whether or not it has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10). Next, the game ball flowing down along the rectifying passage D50 is discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, and then is inclined slightly to the left in the horizontal direction and has a first stage passage D51-. 1, after rolling on each of the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the outlet D36.

  Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are formed. The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed in advance by being fixed to the game board. That is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first big prize opening electric combination C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 The game ball released from the rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 → The game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → the second The game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third stage passage D51-3 → the game ball released from the third stage passage D51-3 is released toward the out port D36. , And are configured to take a substantially uniform flow-down mode.

  In this way, since the game balls that have flowed down the right-handed route take a substantially uniform flow-down mode, if the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at an interval of about 0.6 seconds) When the player enters the game starting port H10 stably and the second large prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the open state (retracted state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and the second big prize winning port is extended). When the ball enters stably in (C20) and the first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d is in an open state, the ball can be stably entered into the first big prize opening C10. In addition, in the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3, the second main game start opening electric role that can take the retracted state and the advanced state The object B11d is provided, and when the second main game start port electric accessory B11d enters the advanced state, the game ball can be guided toward the second main game start port B10. However, this point will be described later.

  In such a configuration, the game ball released from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second grand prize winning electrical accessory C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, a configuration for scraping the momentum of the game ball flowing down (substantially dropping) in the rectifying passage D50 is essential. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in the vicinity of the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 projects into the rectifying passage D50, and this shape causes the game ball to pass through the rectifying passage D50. It is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball by falling into a zigzag. In addition, in this embodiment, although it is equipped with the structure for scraping the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball which rolls on the 1st step path | route D51-1 by the same reason, this point Will be described later.

  Next, a configuration for scraping the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, the first stage passage D51-1 is slightly inclined to the left in the horizontal direction, and is formed by the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. The big prize opening electric accessory C21d itself is a flat member. Therefore, since the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 becomes an acceleration tendency as it is, unless any device for scraping the momentum of the game ball is applied, Even if the second grand prize opening electrical accessory C21d in the advanced state is displaced to the retracted state {in particular, a series of displacements of the advanced state → the retracted state → the advanced state is instantaneously (for example, about 0.1 second) When it is performed}, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be guided well to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and in the second big prize opening C20). Therefore, in this embodiment, like the shape of the flow path provided in the vicinity of the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the game ball that rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 is devised so as to progress in a zigzag manner. .

  More specifically, within the range in which the game ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, a plurality of projections D51-1-1 are provided on the surface side of the game board and a plurality are also provided on the transparent plate D16 side. The projections D51-1-2 are provided, and the plurality of projections D51-1-1 and the plurality of projections D51-1-2 are arranged alternately. Here, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 may be configured to be directly fixed to the surface of the game board, but the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are directly connected to the back surface of the transparent plate D16. If fixed, if the transparent plate D16 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of a gaming machine or the like, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 will be exposed to the outside. A person may come into contact with the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 (worst, peel off) (and it is difficult to reuse the transparent plate D16 as a member of another game machine). . Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the present embodiment, the wall surface on the transparent plate D16 side of the wall surface of the box-shaped member C20-1 is moved to the second grand prize opening electric appliance in the advanced state. The plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are configured to be fixed upward with respect to the wall surface of the extended box-shaped member C20-1 by extending upward from C21d.

  Thus, by providing the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 within the range in which the game ball rolls on the first-stage passage D51-1, the first stage Since the game balls rolling on the passage D51-1 progress zigzag, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 tends to decelerate. Here, when a game ball is continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at an interval of about 0.6 seconds), the momentum of the game ball released from the exit of the rectifying passage D50 is cut off. Since the momentum of the game ball that reaches the first stage passage D51-1 and rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 is further decelerated, it rolls on the first stage passage D51-1. As a result of the long period, even if the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1) is momentarily displaced to the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extension) Can successfully guide the game ball to the second grand prize opening C20). In addition, the momentum of the game balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is decelerated. When game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route, the position interval between these game balls is Is narrowed (congestion of game balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 occurs). Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls exist on the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1). Even if the mouthpiece C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1) is momentarily displaced in the retracted state, the plurality of boxes are moved to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and thus in the second big prize opening C20). It is also possible to guide the game balls together (an image diagram is shown in the lower part of the figure).

  Next, the operation mode of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, in the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3, the second main state that can take the retracted state and the advanced state. A game start opening electric accessory B11d is provided (the meaning of the retracted state and the advance state is the same as that of the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d, but as described below, the second main game start In the case of the mouthpiece B11d, when the advance state is adopted, the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in an open state where it is easy to enter, and when the retracted state is adopted, the game is entered at the second main game start port B10. The ball is in a closed state where it is difficult to enter). Here, in the present embodiment, the second main game start port electrical accessory B11d in the retracted state (closed state) is momentarily displaced to the advanced state (open state) for special gameability described later. {Especially when a series of displacements in the retracted state → the advanced state → the retracted state is performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 second)}, the second main game start opening B10 is entered. It is configured so that it can be physically secured.

  More specifically, the game ball that has rolled on the second stage passage D51-2 that is slightly inclined to the left with respect to the horizontal direction once collides with the locking portion D51-2a, and then the third stage passage D51. Starts falling by its own weight toward -3. Here, when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is in the retracted state, it falls as it is and reaches the third stage passage D51-3 (the second stage in the figure). On the other hand, when the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is in the advanced state, the shape of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d itself can accept the falling game ball and the second main game. In addition to being shaped to extend until reaching the start opening B10, it is installed so as to be slightly inclined to the right in the horizontal direction. Rolling is started (as shown in the third row of FIG. 3, the traveling direction of the game ball is switched from left to right). And when the 2nd main game start opening electric accessory B11d is maintaining the advancing state until the game ball which started rolling toward 2nd main game start opening B10 reaches | attains 2nd main game start opening B10 In this case, the ball enters the second main game start port B10 as it is, while the game ball that has started rolling toward the second main game start port B10 reaches the second main game start port B10. When the two main game start opening electric accessory B11d is displaced to the retracted state, the ball falls toward the third stage passage D51-3 without entering the second main game start opening B10 (see FIG. This corresponds to the subsequent game ball in the fourth stage).

  In such a case, the time required for the game ball that has started rolling toward the second main game start port B10 to reach the second main game start port B10 is about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds. Even if the second main game start port electric accessory B11d in the retracted state is momentarily displaced to the advanced state, {especially, the retracted state → the advanced state → the retracted state When the series of displacements are instantaneously performed (for example, in about 0.1 seconds), it is physically possible to ensure that the second main game start port B10 does not enter the ball.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 Turning on / off the launching device D42 that launches each ball, the launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Here, although not particularly illustrated, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured not to provide an unused area in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is preferable (for example, all unused areas are filled with zeros, and used areas are filled in young addresses and written). Also, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referenced due to noise or fraudulent behavior, unused data (for example, data referenced in gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable that the data is not provided. Similarly, when the RAM area is used, it is preferable that the area is used at a young address and an unused program area is not provided. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. )}, Drive solenoids (not shown) such as the first big prize opening solenoid C13, the second big prize opening solenoid C24, etc., information display LEDs (not shown), etc. that are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown) as described above. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control part SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each unit included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  First, the main control board M has a game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of games such as special games and specific games. And the game progress means MP that manages the current and past game states [e.g., state relating to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability varying game state, time-reduced game state), special game state}, state relating to the auxiliary game (Easy release state, non-easy release state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, game status during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] Game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing, and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 15R big hit, 8R big hit, 4 Jackpots, loses}, information on variation modes (for example, variation time), special game start signal / status information / end signal, hold information, etc.} for transmitting information transmission control means MT (and unsent commands) A command transmission buffer MT10), and a winning ball payout determining means MH for controlling the winning ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined winning ball based on winning of game balls to various winning holes. Yes.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the entrance determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls to each entrance (starting opening, etc.), and the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting port during the variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progression means MP directly determines the opening / closing of the display control means MP10 for performing control to change and stop each symbol, and the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10. Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game advantageous to the player over the normal game, and a first main game Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, the determination of which game state the current game state is to be transferred to and the second grand prize without the change of the game state (probability variation game state, time-reduced game state) It has a small hit game control means MP40 that manages the execution of a small hit game that can open the mouth C20, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of shifting the game state based on the determination. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the entrance determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start entrance A10, and a second main game start entrance. The second main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and the auxiliary game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10 In the first winning prize entrance determining means MJ11-C10 and the second winning prize opening C20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first winning prize opening C10. A second prize winning entrance entry judging means MJ11-C20 that judges whether or not a game ball has entered, and a V prize entrance entrance that judges whether or not a game ball has entered the V prize opening C22. Determination means MJ11-V.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result, To first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, first winning random number, first variation mode determining random number, first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and second main game starting port B10 And determining whether or not to acquire the second main game random number based on the incoming game ball, and depending on the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number and the like, and whether or not the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired, and an auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H There.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “random number” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like. By acquiring a random number by such a method, it is possible to generate an aperiodic random number that is difficult to be predicted by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of a method for generating a next random number using a random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 uses the hold digest control means MJ31 for controlling the processing related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game side random number obtained in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been granted. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission is granted. -It is determined whether to temporarily store the second main game random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, and the random number is given the symbol variation permission based on the determination result The second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game acquired in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol change permission is not granted It is determined whether or not the random number is temporarily stored, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted. And have.

  Here, the pending digest control means MJ31 has a change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not a condition for starting change is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store a maximum of four, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN makes a special game if the result of the lottery is a winning lottery means MN10 for lottery of whether or not the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is open. Special game transition determining means MN20 for determining the transition of the game (for example, turning on the hit flag internally), variable fixed control means MN30 for determining and managing the variable fixed time related to the main game symbol, and each random number The symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol, the variation mode determining means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on each random number, There is a sorting role control means MN60 for controlling the driving of the object C23, and a V winning opening control means MN70 for controlling processing relating to the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening C22. Here, the success / failure lottery means MN10 is a first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A that performs a success / failure lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game winner / rejection lottery unit that performs a success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for making a winning / notifying lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the success / failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbol. The first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol on / off lottery Each of which has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. The fluctuation fixing control means MN30 has a fluctuation fixing time timer MN30t for measuring the fluctuation fixing time.

  Here, when executing the lottery determination based on the main game random number, the success / failure lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any one of all the winning random number values, If some or all of the random number values are continuous numbers, the main game random number value is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the hit random number value and is determined to determine whether it is greater than or equal to the lower limit value. . By executing such determination as to whether or not it is correct, accurate determination processing can be executed. On the contrary, when the determination is made by comparison with only the upper limit of the hit random number range, or only with the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) needs to be a random number value, making it vulnerable to fraud (for example, fraudulent action of passing current through the main control board M, where all bits in the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a risk of end. In this example, one lottery is executed using one random number {when a plurality of random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery is executed), two random numbers are used. Because it needs to be prevented from synchronizing}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 and the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number) and the acquisition Based on the determined game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, for the game state, for the normal game → the first main game normal game state). Lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, for the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery). Table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time shortening game → auxiliary game time lottery table).

  Next, the variation mode determination unit MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first primary game random number). MN 51-A and second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), And auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal (Game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the gaming state (for example, regarding the gaming state, normal game → second main game normal game) State lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  In addition, the sorting tool control means MN60 is a sorting tool related information temporary storage means MN60b that temporarily stores information relating to the operation timing of the sorting tool, and a sorting tool that measures the operating time of the sorting tool C23. And a role-operating timer MN60t.

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling to stop display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are assisted for a predetermined time. Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling to stop and display after changing the game symbol is provided.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening / closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is satisfied. The second main game start port electric player opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game start port electric player B11d -B.

  Next, when the special game control means MP30 satisfies the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transfer condition, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second grand prize port C20 in a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first grand prize port) Special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second big prize opening C20). Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes first and second prize winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first prize winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 is provided. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. The special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table) Details are not shown).

  Next, the small hit game control means MP40 is a small hit game timer MP41t for measuring the opening time of the first big prize opening C10 in the small hit game, and a discharge standby timer for managing the discharge standby time in the small hit game. MP41t-2 and small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b for temporarily storing information related to the small hit game.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition for the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition for the time-reduced game state is satisfied. Has a short-time game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the short-time game end condition determining means MP52 has a short-time number counter MP52c capable of counting the short-time number. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game or a time shortening game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). Also, the time-reduced game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game with no time limit restriction). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). The probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the short time game end condition determination means MP52 described above are, for example, a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. (A so-called pachinko gaming machine having a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, on / off of various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C are stopped according to the first or second main game symbol that is currently changing (the first or second main game symbol that satisfies the change start condition). There are first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as stop symbols related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbols (auxiliary game symbols for which the change start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. Effect display control means SM20 that controls the information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereafter, each said means is explained in full detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the decorative pattern variation mode and stop symbol determination processing and display control processing, and the decorative symbol display control processing that holds the decorative symbol hold count management and hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, background effect display control means SM23 for determining background image determination processing and display control processing, notice effect display control means SM24 for controlling determination effect display processing and display control processing, and reach effect content Display control processing of reach effect display control means SM25 that controls decision processing and display control processing, and right-handed instruction display (display for prompting the player to make a right-hand hit, first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display) Right-handed instruction display control means SM26, and V-winning detection effect display control means SM27 which controls display control processing of V-winning detection effects.

  Here, the decorative design display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the display design content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design, and the decorative design display variation SM21n. The drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and the drawing variation time management timer SM21t for timing the variation time of the decorative symbols; ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further includes a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). (Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information relating to the hold related to the decorative design.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores information related to the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. And background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content and display timing of the notice effect, and the information related to the notice effect display. Is temporarily stored in advance notice related information SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is based on information from the main control board M side, reach effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect, and information related to the reach effect display. Reach production related information temporary storage means SM25b.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control part) SS displays an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG and the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control part SM side. Control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  From here, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). . Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 7 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed intentionally by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up to the RAM in Step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up to the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored in the RAM of the main control board M in Step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  It should be noted that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured not to be a value at which a special game is executed (immediately after starting the program processing, noise or fraudulent behavior). In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process for determining whether to execute the special game has been executed.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in Step 1900, the main control board M executes a distribution combination control process described later. Next, at step 1950, the main control board M executes a V winning opening entrance determination process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the winning ball payout determining means MH) receives the winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH is caused to execute and a process for managing the result is executed (in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls based on one winning in the first main game starting port A10 is “3”. "3", the number of winning balls based on one winning at the second main game start opening B10 is "3", the number of winning balls based on one winning at the first large winning opening C10 is "15", the second The prize ball payout control process is executed assuming that the number of prize balls based on one prize to the big prize opening C20 is “3”). Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being performed. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). In some cases, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M determines to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands are set).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball enters (inflow, passes in the case of a gate) at the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on how many pieces are held, in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 or step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag). In addition to the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game short time flag Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than in the case of being off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sends the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). Predetermined time related to the variation time {for example, when the auxiliary game short flag is on, 0.1 second (that is, a time shorter than the game ball firing interval of 0.6 seconds), and when the auxiliary game short flag is off 10 seconds (that is, a time longer than 0.6 seconds between game ball firings)} is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, at step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. In step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “winning”. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric game instrument in the start opening electric game machine release timer MP22t-B (for example, 2.0 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, 0 when the auxiliary game short time flag is off) .12 seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric combination B11d. Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and determines the time for opening the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric combination B11d and temporarily turns the auxiliary game state temporarily. The electric-powered object opening flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1300).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1242, in step 1243, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B enters the second main game start port input from the second main game start port entrance detecting device B11s. Based on the ball information, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (in this example, one) of balls has entered the second main game start opening B10. If Yes in step 1243, the process proceeds to step 1244, and if No in step 1243, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1300). If NO in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242. If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224, or step 1230, the next process (step 1300) is performed. The process proceeds to (1).

  Here, the relationship between the type of the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol in the present embodiment and the release mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is shown outside the figure. In the present embodiment, there are a loss symbol “D0” and a winning symbol “D1” as stop game types of the auxiliary game symbols, and when the auxiliary game short time flag is OFF (in the non-time reduction game state) In the case where the lost symbol “D0” is selected approximately deterministically, the winning symbol “D1” is selected approximately deterministically when the auxiliary gaming time short flag is ON (in the time-reduced gaming state). It is configured. Further, when the winning symbol “D1” is stopped and displayed when the auxiliary game short time flag is off (in the non-time-reduced game state), the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is “0.12 seconds”. When the auxiliary game short time flag is on (in the time saving game state) and the winning symbol “D1” is stopped and displayed, the second main game start opening electric accessory It is closed after B11d “opens for 2.0 seconds”. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the aspect of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is not a well-known tulip type, but a flat member provided so as to be buried in the game board surface is a player. In a state of protruding to the side and a retracted state of being retracted with respect to the player side (so-called “velo-type electric chew”), and in the advanced state, the flat plate shape It takes about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds for the game ball falling on the member to roll on the flat plate member and enter the second main game start port B10. It is configured. That is, when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is “opened for 0.12 seconds” (≈the period during which the flat plate-like member is maintained in the advanced state is 0.12 seconds), for example, Even if the 2-main game start opening B1d is opened, it is configured not to enter the second main game start opening B10. In addition, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d was scheduled to perform “open for 2.0 seconds” (≈the period during which the flat plate-like member is maintained in the advanced state is 2.0 seconds). Even in the case, when there is a predetermined number of balls (one in this example) at the second main game start opening B10, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is closed, in other words, Since the plate-like member is in the retracted state before the period in which the plate-like member is maintained in the advanced state expires, for example, a subsequent game ball moves on the plate-like member (second main game) Even if it rolls (toward the start opening B10), the subsequent game ball falls without reaching the second main game start opening B10. In other words, even if the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is scheduled to be "opened for 2.0 seconds", the second main game start opening B10 has a predetermined number (in this example, 1 piece). It is configured so that it is easy to ensure that only the incoming ball is generated.

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game start entrance entrance information from the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. Is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and determines the main game (especially the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (four in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning lottery random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol lottery random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are obtained in series at this timing (for example, only the winning lottery random number is a so-called hardware random number, Others may be so-called software random numbers). Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control unit MJ30 determines whether the newly generated hold command (pending number, held random number value, determination result or main result previously determined based on the held random number value, Set the stop symbol of game symbol, information related to variation mode, etc.) to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmit to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999) The process proceeds to step 1312. Also, if the answer is No in step 1302 or 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312.

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game start entrance ball judging means MJ11-B enters the second main game start entrance ball from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. It is determined whether or not information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1313, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B determines whether or not the predetermined error condition regarding illegally entering the second main game start opening B10 is not satisfied. Determine. Here, as described above, due to the configuration of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d and the like, in the present embodiment, in the non-time-reduced gaming state (assuming that the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d Even if is opened, the second main game start opening B10 is not entered, and in the time-saving game state (the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is scheduled to be "opened for 2.0 seconds") In this case, it is difficult to generate more balls than the predetermined number (in this example, one) at the second main game starting port B10. A condition for monitoring whether or not a ball entering the second main game start opening B10 contrary to (design) has occurred is set. In the case of Yes in step 1313, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (four in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the first lottery random number for the first main game and the right lottery random number for the second main game) Are set to the same range. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 determines whether the newly generated hold command (pending number, held random number value, determination result or main result determined in advance based on the held random number value, Set the stop symbol of game symbol, information related to variation mode, etc.) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (transmit to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999) The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Also in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1313, that is, in the case where a predetermined error condition relating to illegal entry to the second main game start opening B10 is satisfied, there is no particular limitation, but for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state When there is a ball entering the second main game start opening B10, only error notification is executed to continue the game progress, while a predetermined number of second main game start openings B10 in the time-saving game state ( For example, if there are more than six balls, an error notification may be executed and the game progress may be stopped (processing after the processing is interrupted) (processing at step 1322) Is applicable). In addition, the error notification execution conditions are as follows: (1) When the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened once, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is activated from the second main game start. If there is more than a predetermined number (for example, 6) of balls in the starting port B10, (2) the second main game start when the second main game starting port electric component B11d is closed accumulated during the game When the number of balls entering the mouth B10 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 3), (3) the second main game start opening after the timing when the error notification condition (1) or (2) is satisfied Each time one game ball enters B10, it may be.

  In step 1308 and step 1318, the first main game content determination random number is stored and the second main game content determination random number is stored, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. Is stored, and only the information related to the “main game content determination random number” is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure such that other information such as value is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like) To prevent it). In addition, with respect to the winning lottery random number, the change of the gaming state (from the gaming state related to the hold that has already been recorded) between the acquisition of the winning lottery random number and the execution of the winning lottery related to the winning lottery random number. Since not only the change but also the game state may change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of the lottery execution related to the lottery random number may be unpredictable). Until the process is executed, the lottery random number is stored.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether there is no hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the pending digest control means MJ31 determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not in a special game (or in a condition device in operation) (for example, a special game execution flag to be described later is not turned on) and is not in a main game symbol change (for example, a variable flag to be described later). Is not on), there is a hold of the main game symbol, it is not in the small hit game (for example, the small hit execution flag described later is not on), and it is not in the variable fixed time (for example, described later) It is a condition that the variable fixing flag is not ON) (in addition, as described above, the case where the progress of the game is not interrupted is also included in the condition).

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digest control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation that is temporarily stored is read and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, in Step 1408, the winning / not determining lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming winning / not determining lottery table MN11ta-A (second main gaming notifying lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, and the first main Based on the game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 14 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of determination table for the first main game side and the second main game side, that is, a so-called probability variation function. There is no feature (this embodiment is characterized in that a large number of big hits can be continued in a short period of time without having a probability variation function). Instead, a big hit {so-called round (hereinafter, simply referred to as “R”) can be executed a plurality of times} in addition to a small hit (so-called round can be executed only once). As will be described later, when the result of the success / failure determination is a small hit, the big hit is induced (even if the result of the determination is not a big hit). Yes. In addition, since the structure which induces this big hit should just be implement | achieved by at least any one of the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side, the case where the result of the said success / failure determination becomes a small win is the 1st main game And the second main game side may be configured to occur at the table (however, as will be described later, in order to continue multiple big hits in a short period of time, the success or failure on the second main game side) It is preferable that the table for determination is configured to win a small hit.) In the present embodiment, in particular, the second main game side is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/6) (assuming that there are four holds on the second main game side). In this case, if the winning is about 1/6, the expectation of winning the winnings is about 50% until the four reservations are exhausted). The configuration of the main game table 1 is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to provide a small hit on the first main game side, and it is not necessary to provide a loss on the second main game side.

  Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) determines the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination). Referring to the lottery table MN41ta-B), the stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game symbol determination result lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number) Are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 14 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, one main game symbol is a big hit symbol from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “7A” and “7B”). Is configured to be determined as Note that the number of rounds of special games and the opening time of the big prize opening determined with reference to the main game symbol are “4R” big hit for “7A” and “15R” big hit for “7B”. Note that the random number value and the type of stop symbol are also just examples, and are not limited thereto. In this embodiment, the number of special games related to the first main game is different from the number of special games related to the second main game, and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the special game is different. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of rounds of special games related to the first main game and the number of special games related to the second main game are both set to “15R”, and the opening mode of the big prize opening is different. By doing so, the number of game balls that can be acquired during a special game may be made different.

  Next, in Step 1416, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) selects the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta corresponding to each gaming state. -Refer to A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), main game symbol determination lottery result and first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially variation mode lottery On the basis of the random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 14 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this figure, in the present embodiment, based on the result of lottery determination of the main game symbol, the main game short flag state, the variation mode (variation) Time) can be determined. For example, for a certain random number value, if the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit), it is easy to determine a change mode in which the change time is relatively long, and the main game short time flag is on In this case (short-time gaming state), it is configured such that a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined (other matters that are characteristic regarding the variation time will be described later). This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game short-time flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side Is configured to be advantageous for the player, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). It is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished in order to establish the situation.

  Also, as shown in the figure, in this example, the variation time related to the second main game symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state is 15 seconds when lost and 60 seconds when winning (big hit, small hit). Only the variation time of the type is selected, and in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the same effect (the effect related to the variation of the decorative design, details will be described later) according to the variation time. It is comprised so that it may be performed (in the case of winning, the effect which alert | reports a hit will be performed after execution of the effect at the time of a loss). The configuration of the main game table 3 is not limited to this, and the shortest variation time on the first main game side considering all the game states, the result of success / failure, and the number of holds, It may be configured to be shorter than the shortest variation time on the second main game side in consideration of the number of holdings. For example, in the case of the shortest variation time, the non-time-reduced gaming state and the first When the main game pending number is the maximum number and lost (or when the time-reduced gaming state is lost), the shortest variation time on the first main game side is set to “1 second” and the time-reduced gaming state and the second The shortest variation time on the second main game side in the case where the number of two main game holds is the maximum number and loses may be “3 seconds”. In addition, only the variation on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the type and selection rate of the variation time selection depends on the number of main game reservations {other (for example, the first main game in the time-reduced gaming state) The second main game side change in the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the second main game side change in the time-reduced gaming state) may be configured so as not to depend on the number of main game holds}.

  Next, at step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes a variable fixed time determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1418, the game content determination means MN sends the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The information related to the determined main game symbol such as the variation mode information and the command related to the current gaming state) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999) (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, at step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display part A21g (first main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the main game symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1428.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If YES in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1426, in step 1440, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. Then, it is determined whether or not a variable fixing flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1438 described later) is turned on. If Yes in step 1440, the process proceeds to step 1441, and if No in step 1440, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that symbol variation has ended (the symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The change display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display part B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as the fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1436, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the variable fixed time related to the variable determined in step 1450 to the variable fixed time timer MN30t, and starts the timer To do. Next, in step 1438, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the variable fixed flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. Then, the process proceeds to step 1441.

  Next, in step 1441, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the variable fixed time timer MN30t and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1441, in step 1442, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is in the fixed fixed state in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. The flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1444. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1441, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, at step 1444, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in Step 1444, in Step 1445, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a jackpot symbol stop command {a command for executing a V winning detection effect described later, this embodiment. In the game, by performing the same effect as when winning the game ball to the V winning opening C22, the game is performed by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball flows down to the right side of the game area D30. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (the aim is to make the player feel the progress of the game at the time of execution) to be smooth. Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1446, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444, in step 1447, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1447, in step 1448, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to step 1500. Note that if the result in step 1447 is No, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, at step 1500, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Even in the case of No in step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the variable fixation control means MN30 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game short time flag is on (in other words, in the time reduction game state). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easy to open and whether or not it is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and is the change related to the second main game symbol? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C, and determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to the small hit. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation as a long time (30 seconds in this example), and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1418). To do. As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time of the end of the fluctuation related to the time reduction gaming state and the small hit on the second main game side, the time for causing the hold on the second main game side is secured (details will be described later). However, in the present embodiment, a large number of game balls are acquired depending on whether or not the second main game side hold generated in the time reduction game state is digested in the non-time reduction game state and the small hit is won Since it is a game nature that determines whether or not it can be done, it is important to ensure that the second main game side holds up to the upper limit number of reserves in the time-saving game state) It is configured to be long. Note that the above-described configuration for causing the second main game side to hold up to the upper limit number of holdings is not limited to this. It may be configured to occur during the opening period of the second grand prize winning opening C20 related to the game, or may be configured to occur during the fluctuation related to the small hit won in the time-saving gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, step 1454, or step 1456, in step 1462, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be a short time (0.2 seconds in this example), and then The process proceeds to (process of step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time / count counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time / count) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508 and step 1510, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. The process proceeds to (the process of step 1600). Note that if the answer is No in step 1502 or step 1506, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the condition device operation flag (the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a big hit as described above). (It is a flag that is turned on when the symbol is stopped and displayed. However, as described later, when a small hit game is executed, the flag is also turned on when a ball is entered into the V winning opening C22) It is determined whether or not is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 turns off the specific game flag (main game short flag / auxiliary game short flag) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. To do. Next, in step 1610, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). In the case of No in step 1602, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1702, in Steps 1704 and 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission is not granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 stores the release pattern (for example, “29.0 seconds” in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Open pattern (open → closed) is set. Next, in step 1716, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big prize opening electric accessory C11d of the first big prize opening C10 to open the first big prize opening C10, and the special game timer MP34t ( In particular, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) is set in the opening time timer), and the process proceeds to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes in steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current round number, game ball winning number, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winning balls have been placed in the first big winning opening C10 in the round. judge. If Yes in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, in step 1726, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) to determine the predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) relating to the special prize opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process proceeds to step 1728. If No in step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1800).

  Next, in step 1728, the special game executing means MP33 stops driving the first big prize opening electric accessory C11d of the first big prize opening C10 and closes the first big prize opening C10. Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (particularly an open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1733, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1738, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). In step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1800). In the case of No in step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and after the special game related to the first main game side is ended (the first main game). It is determined whether or not the game is after a special game related to the big hit symbol and after a special game related to the game ball entering the V winning opening C22 triggered by the stop of the first main game small bonus symbol) To do. If YES in step 1752, the process proceeds to step 1755. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in other words, if it is after the end of the special game related to the second main game symbol, in step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means After referring to MB11b-C, after the end of the special game won in the time-saving game state (after the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol and to the V prize opening C22 triggered by the stop of the second main game small hit symbol Whether or not the special game related to the entry of the game ball is included). If Yes in step 1754, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1800) (the gaming state becomes a non-time-reduced gaming state), and if No in step 1754, the process proceeds to step 1755. As described above, in the present embodiment, after the special game on the first main game side ends, the game state after the special game is determined without depending on the game state at the time of the special game win, After the special game on the second main game side is finished, the game state after the special game is determined depending on the game state at the time of winning the special game.

  Next, in step 1755, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1756 and step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, in step 1801, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and is a discharge waiting flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1822 described later, After the execution of the played small hit game (especially the planned opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20), the waiting period for discharging the game balls remaining in the second big prize opening C20 (waiting for discharge) It is determined whether or not the flag turned on during (time) is off. If YES in step 1801, in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If YES in step 1802, in step 1804, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1805, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the second big winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in the case of the small hit symbol “2AK”: open for 0.73 seconds → closed) In the case of the small hit symbol “4AK”: “0.13 seconds open → 0.5 second closed” is repeated three times → 0.13 seconds open → closed, small hit symbol “7AK”: 0.13 seconds open → 5.87 seconds closed → “0.13 seconds open → 0.87 seconds closed” is repeated twice → 0.25 seconds open → closed, small hit symbol “BK”: 0.09 seconds open → 5. 91 seconds closed → “0.09 seconds open → 0.91 seconds closed” is repeated 5 times → 0.09 seconds open → closed). Next, at step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, at step 1807, the small hit game control means MP40 assigns a distribution character operation start permission flag (to be described later, the distribution character C23 is in the flag area of the distribution character related information temporary storage means MN60b). Is turned on). Next, at step 1808, at step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the second big prize opening C20 and starts a small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1809, the small hit game control means MP40 starts a discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1812. In the present embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, thereby waiting for the discharge after a predetermined time (13 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the start of the small hit game. {Of course, the method of measuring the discharge waiting time is not limited to this. For example, the scheduled small hit game (particularly, the scheduled second big prize opening C20 is opened). The measurement may be started after the execution of the pattern (in this case, assuming that the discharge standby time is uniform, in the case of the small hit symbol “2AK”, the small hit is earlier than the other ones. The game will end)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1802, in step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. To do. If Yes in step 1810, the process proceeds to step 1812.

  Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the second big prize opening winning detection device C21s and determines whether or not there is a win (ball) in the second big prize opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1812, in step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls in the second big winning opening C20. It is determined whether or not there was. If Yes in step 1814, the process proceeds to step 1818. On the other hand, if No in step 1812 or step 1814, in step 1816, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game timer MP41t for a predetermined time (in this example, for example, small For winning symbol “2AK”: Open for 0.73 seconds → Closed, For small hit symbol “4AK”: Repeat “Open for 0.13 seconds → Close for 0.5 seconds” three times → Open for 0.13 seconds → Closed In the case of small hit symbol “7AK”: 0.13 seconds open → 5.87 seconds closed → “0.13 seconds open → 0.87 seconds closed” is repeated twice → 0.25 seconds open → closed, small hits In the case of the symbol “BK”: 0.09 seconds open → 5.91 seconds closed → “0.09 seconds open → 0.91 seconds closed” is repeated 5 times → 0.09 seconds open → closed) It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. If YES in step 1816, the process proceeds to step 1818.

  Next, in step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 stops the driving of the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d and closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the discharge standby flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b (the discharge standby time is started from this processing execution timing). The process proceeds to step 1824. In the case of No in step 1801, the process proceeds to step 1824.

  Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the discharge standby timer MP41t-2, and determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (13 seconds in this example). . In the case of Yes in Step 1824, in Step 1825, the small hit game control means MP40 clears the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, at step 1826, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the discharge waiting flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 1900 processing). . Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1900) also in the case of No in Step 1810, Step 1816 or Step 1824.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the assigned character control process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, at step 1902, the assigned character control means MN60 refers to the flag area of the assigned character related information temporary storage means MN60b, and determines whether or not the assigned character operation start permission flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the assigned character control means MN60 turns off the assigned character operation start permission flag in the flag area of the assigned character related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, at step 1906, the sorting tool control means MN60 starts a sorting tool operating timer MN60t (increment timer). Next, at step 1908, the assigned character control means MN60 turns on the assigned character operating flag in the flag area of the assigned character related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, in step 1910, the sorting tool control means MN60 operates the sorting tool C23 to the second position, and proceeds to step 1912. In the case of No in step 1902, the process proceeds to step 1912. Here, in the present embodiment, the sorting tool C23 is the first position as the initial position (the position where the game ball is stored is the upward direction when viewed from the player, In some cases, when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening C20, the game ball that has entered the ball stops at a position where the game ball is stored in the sorting role C23. In addition, the second position is a position where the portion where the game ball is stored is in the right direction when viewed from the player (when the game ball enters the second big prize opening C20 in the case of the position, The position at which the game ball that has entered is not stored in the sorting tool C23).

  Next, at step 1912, the assigned character control means MN60 refers to the flag area of the assigned character related information temporary storage means MN60b and determines whether or not the assigned character operating flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the sorting tool control means MN60 refers to the sorting tool operation timer MN60t, and the timer value is the first operation value (the sorting tool is moved from the second position to the second position). It is a timer value that operates at one position, and is the same timing as the opening timing of the second big prize opening C20 for the second time in the small hit game related to the small hit symbol “7AK” and the small hit symbol “BK”, In this example, it is determined whether or not 6 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 1914, in step 1916, the sorting tool control unit MN60 operates the sorting tool C23 to the first position, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1950).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1914, in step 1918, the assigned character control means MN60 refers to the assigned character actuating timer MN60t, and the timer value is the second operation value (the assigned character is the first position). It is a timer value that operates from the first position to the second position, and is a timing during the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 12 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 1918, in step 1920, the sorting tool control unit MN60 operates the sorting tool C23 to the second position, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1950). If a game ball is stored in the sorting tool C23 at the timing of the process in step 1920, the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 with this process as a trigger.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1918, in step 1922, the assigned character control means MN60 refers to the assigned character actuating timer MN60t, and the timer value is the third operation value (the assigned character is the second position). It is determined whether or not the timer value is 12.5 seconds in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the sorting tool control means MN60 operates the sorting tool C23 to the first position. Next, in step 1926, the assigned character control means MN60 turns off the assigned character operating flag in the flag area of the assigned character related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, in step 1928, the assigned character control means MN60 clears the assigned character actuating timer MN60t to zero, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1950). Note that if the answer is No in step 1912 or step 1922, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1950).

  Here, the upper right part of FIG. The initial position of the sorting tool C23 is the first position, and when the small hit game is started, the sorting tool C23 is operated to the second position, and “second position → first position → “Second position → initial position (first position)”. In effect, the sorting agent operation timer value becomes the first operation value and becomes the first position. → A game ball enters the second big prize opening C20. → The game ball reaches the sorting tool C23. → Game balls are stored in the distribution game C23 → The distribution game machine operation timer value becomes the second operation value and becomes the second position → The stored game balls enter the V winning opening C22 A big hit (special game) is induced by performing a series of operations.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and is a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, ie, discharge) It is determined whether or not the flag (which is turned on when a game ball enters the V prize opening C22) during the standby time is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the V winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-V and determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C22. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the V winning opening control means MN70 makes the V winning opening effective period (a period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). Determine whether there is. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the V winning opening control means MN70 transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect described later) to the sub main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Although not shown, at the time of this processing execution, error notification is executed at the time of a small hit game related to a small hit symbol ("2AK", "4AK" in this example) that should not enter the V winning opening C22. It is configured to Next, in step 1960, the V prize opening control means MN70 turns on the conditional apparatus operation reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). To do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the V winning opening control means MN70 makes the V winning opening effective period (a period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not the process has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and performs the next process (process in step 1997). ). Note that if the answer is No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Further, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, in the case where the risk of fraudulent entry such as a game ball entering the V winning opening C22 increases even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that the error processing is appropriately performed. The number of rounds of special games related to entering the V winning opening C22 is “15R”, and the total flow of “special game related to entering the small winning game → V winning opening C22” is totaled. Then, “1R” of the number of rounds related to the small hit game and “15R” of the number of rounds related to the special game are “16R”.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described. First, FIG. 22 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting, such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is stored). If received, the sub-side RAM is initialized, various information commands are received, and the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (e) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (e) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 5 (e), first, at step 2050, the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM displays a right-handed instruction display to be described later. Execute control processing. Next, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a V winning detection effect display control process described later. Next, at step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2700, the sub game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (transmits commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side). The repetition processing routine is terminated.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2050 to S2700) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5F is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is sent to one terminal (in this example) of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM. , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (f). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives the command input port (from the main control board M side). Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (eg, main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is restored.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the right-handed instruction display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. If YES in step 2052, in step 2054, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Are transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). The right-handed instruction display (first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display) is also displayed during the variable fixed time (long variable fixed time) in the time-saving gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2052, in step 2056, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the small hit game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2057, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the small hit symbol related to the small hit currently being executed is “2AK” (second large This is a small hit design where the winning opening C20 is opened only once, and it is not a case where a game ball is designed not to enter the V winning opening C22 by the control operation of the sorting role C23 described above. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2057, the process proceeds to step 2054. Here, to supplement the processing, when the small hit symbol related to the small hit currently being executed is “2AK”, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed. While it is difficult to recognize whether it is executed or not, the right-handed instruction display is displayed when the small hit symbol related to the currently executed small hit is “4AK” or “7AK”. The player can easily recognize whether or not the small hit is being executed. In addition, even when the small hit symbol related to the small hit currently being executed is “4AK”, the game ball is designed not to enter the V winning opening C22 by the control operation of the sorting role C23 described above. In this case, in this case, when the small hit symbol related to the currently executed small hit is “7AK” (the game ball is sent to the V prize opening C22 by the control operation of the sorting role C23 described above). Is performed in the same manner as the case (a case where the player is designed to enter the ball) (a process for displaying a right-handed instruction display), so the player hits the right with the expectation that a big hit will be induced. (A game ball is fired toward the second grand prize opening C20). Further, when the small hit symbol related to the currently executed small hit is “2AK”, a right-handed instruction display may be displayed. In such a case, the right hit related to “2AK” may be displayed. It is desirable to configure the hitting instruction display so that the player has lower visibility (not noticeable) than the right-handing instruction display related to other small hit symbols. In addition, even if the same small-hit symbol, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the small-hit symbol. For example, the right-hit during the small-hit game related to “2AK” When hitting a small hit game related to “2AK” in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the hitting instruction display does not execute the right-handed instruction display as before the small hit game, and in the time-reduced gaming state. When the small hit game related to “2AK” is won, the first right-handed instruction display may be executed in the same manner as before the start of the small hit game, and during the small hit game related to “4AK” and “7AK” When the right-handed instruction display is won in the small hit game related to “4AK” or “7AK” in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the player is more than the player who wins the right-handed instruction display in the time-reduced gaming state. So that it is highly visible (conspicuous) It may form. Note that the visibility is a display area occupancy ratio such as transparency and how much of the entire display area SG10 occupies, and is not limited to the visibility, and the sound and the effect light emission mode may be varied. (It is good also as the presence or absence of sound and effect light emission).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2056 or step 2057, in step 2058, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub-sub control unit SS side). Is transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2058, in step 2062, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for erasing the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display (display command transmission control processing in step 2700). And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. The first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display are displayed at positions that do not overlap on the effect display device SG. Also, since the situation where the second right-handed instruction display is displayed is more loss of the player's profit when the right-handed is not executed than the situation where only the first right-handed instruction display is displayed, The second right-handed instruction display is configured to be easier for the player to see (conspicuous) than the first right-handed instruction display. In this example, the right-handed instruction display has two types (first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types may be provided. In the shortened game state, “Transition to time-reduced game state → Change related to small hits → Start of small hit game → First release of second big prize opening C20 → Second open of second big prize opening C20 → Small hit The first right-handed instruction display (display mode similar to the present embodiment) is displayed in the entire flow in the series of “End of”, and (1) At the transition timing to the time-reduced gaming state , Display a second right-handed instruction display (for example, a display mode of a red arrow pointing to the right, which is larger than the first right-handed instruction display), and change start timing related to the small hit (or during the change related to the small hit Change related to certain timing or small hits At the fixed time start timing, etc., the second right-handed instruction display is erased, and a third right-handed instruction display (for example, a right-pointing giraffe pattern arrow display that is larger than the first right-handed instruction display) Mode) is displayed, and the third right-handed instruction display is erased and the fourth right-handed instruction display (for example, the second main game start is started) at the timing after the start of the fluctuation relating to the small hit and before the start of the small hit game. Display mode that encourages the launch of a game ball toward the mouthpiece B11d), after the first opening of the second grand prize opening C20 and before the second opening of the second big prize opening C20 At the timing of, the fourth right-handed instruction display is deleted, and a fifth right-handed instruction display (for example, a display mode that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the second winning prize opening C20) is displayed. (2) Second right-handed at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming Display indication (for example, a display mode of a red arrow pointing to the right that is larger than the first right-handed instruction display), and a change start timing related to the small hit (or a certain timing during the change related to the small hit, Alternatively, the second right-handed instruction display is erased at the fixed fixed time start timing related to the small hit, etc., and a third right-handed instruction display (for example, a rightward display that is larger than the first right-handed instruction display) (Display mode of an arrow with a giraffe pattern) is displayed, and the third right-handed instruction display is erased and the fourth right-handed instruction display ( For example, a display that informs the player that the state of high profits continues) is displayed after the first opening of the second grand prize opening C20, and the second opening of the second big prize opening C20. At the previous timing, 4th right-handed instruction You may comprise so that a display may be erase | eliminated and the 3rd right-handed instruction | indication display (For example, the display aspect of the arrow of the rightward giraffe pattern which is a display larger than a 1st right-handed instruction | indication display) may be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main control board M side, a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to the new hold occurrence. It is determined whether or not (holding information relating to a game symbol) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, Add “1” to the maximum number of second main games. Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily sends the new hold result and the command related to the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Store, and go to step 2118.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 2102, has the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b in Step 2111? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the hold information (particularly, the result of the determination, the stopped symbol information, and the fluctuation mode information) related to the symbol change from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. At the same time, the remaining hold information is shifted. Next, in step 2116, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. Note that if the result is No in Step 2111, the process also goes to Step 2118.

  Next, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is placed in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). The same number of on-hold display lamps as the on-drawing on-hold counter value are turned on, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step 2200 processing). In the present embodiment, in the situation where the game progresses by repeating mainly the variable display and stop display of the first main game symbol (in a situation where the game is non-time-reduced game), a special indication is given as a big hit symbol stop display. In a situation where the game is executed mainly, and the game progresses by repeating the display of change and stop of the second main game symbol mainly (under the situation of time-reduced game), Since the game is mainly in the game where the special game is executed when the small winning game is executed with the stop display as an opportunity and the player enters the V winning opening C22, the first main game side and the first game The basic gameplay differs between the two main games. Therefore, when the hold display lamp is turned on, only the hold display on the first main game side is executed in the situation of non-time-reduced game, and the hold on the second main game side is executed in the situation of time-reduction game. It is preferable that only display is performed. However, in the present embodiment, even when the game is a non-time-reduced game, if there is a hold on the second main game side, a special game triggered by further stop indication of the small hit symbol In such a situation, only the hold display on the second main game side is executed (or the hold display on the second main game side is more visible than the hold display on the first main game side. It is more suitable to be configured in such a way as to increase the performance, and after the end of the jackpot (the jackpot related to the entry to the V winning opening C22) triggered by the winning jackpot in the time-saving gaming state (or time reduction) When the game state shifts to the non-time-reduced gaming state after the winning big win is completed, only the hold display on the second main game side is executed (or the hold display on the second main game side is displayed on the first main game side) (Visibility is higher than hold display) It is even more preferred to keep. Regardless of the gaming state, both the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side may be displayed. In such a case, the time is reduced. In the situation of a game, the hold display on the first main game side is more visible than the hold display on the second main game side, and in the situation of a time-saving game, the hold display on the second main game side is the first. It is desirable that the visibility is higher than the hold display on the main game side.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not it is currently in the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2206, in step 2208, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the change is a symbol change related to the first main game symbol. To do. If Yes in step 2208, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2210. With reference to the symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol If it is, it is a flat eye such as “7, 7, 7”, and if it is a lost symbol, it is a “1, 3, 5”, etc.} and a variation mode {for example, a variation relating to the main game symbol If the mode is short-term fluctuation, non-reach, and if long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined and the drawing display related information temporary storage means S is determined. 21b (and informational display related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b) temporarily stored in, the process proceeds to step 2216.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2208, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2212. With reference to the stored symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined, and the variation mode is changed to pseudo continuous variation ( It is determined that the decoration pattern is accompanied by a mode in which the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change, and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the reach effect related information temporary storage). Temporarily store in means SM25b) and go to step 2216.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of fluctuations accompanied by pseudo continuous fluctuations. Here, the “main variation” is a series of steps from the start of the first variation display of the decorative symbol to the final stop of the decorative symbol (depending on the stop display mode) until a definite notification of the success / failure result. The `` pseudo-variation '' is the content of the fluctuation, and after starting the decorative display of the decorative symbol, once the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the determination is not clearly announced and the decorative symbol is newly displayed. “Final pseudo-variation” is a variation to be started. After the decorative symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the success / failure is clearly notified, and the decorative symbol variation display is newly started. This is a variation that does not occur. The “decorable symbol variation period” is a period during which the ornamental symbol can be displayed in a variable manner (including the start of a new variation display), and is the same as the “real variation” period. In addition, the “decoration pattern non-variable period” is a period in which the decoration symbol does not start a new variation display (because the result of the determination is already notified by the stop display mode of the decoration symbol) to the player. It is configured to further execute an effect of definitely informing that it will be a big hit. In addition, as shown in the figure, during the variable display possible period, the effect related to the same decorative design is executed from the start of the fluctuation in the case of loss and the case of big hit or small hit (the temporary stop related to the pseudo fluctuation is An effect that is executed twice is executed). In addition, the purpose of performing such pseudo-continuous variation is to display a stoppage display of a further small hit symbol when the second main game side still remains even in a non-time-reduced game situation. Because it is a structure that can be expected for the execution of special games triggered by it, it is a production aimed at encouraging the expectation, so the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped for each pseudo variation are For example, if the small hit symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed within the remaining second main game side hold (or the symbol variation), the so-called chance eye is stopped and displayed (" It is preferable that a special arrangement such as “1, 2, 3” is configured to stop and display at a higher probability than when the small hit symbol is not displayed. In addition, in the variation relating to the first main game side, the variation accompanied by the pseudo continuous variation may be executed. The number of executions of the variation with a small number of times or with pseudo continuous variation is low (that is, the pseudo continuous variation on the first main game side occurs only in the non-time-reduced gaming state (or from the time-reduced gaming state) Or the occurrence frequency related to the pseudo continuous variation on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state is the occurrence frequency related to the pseudo continuous variation on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state. It is desirable to configure it to be lower than}. In addition, in the case of a variation involving pseudo continuous variation on the second main game side, if the variation is a variation related to big hit or small hit, 15 seconds before the decorative symbol variation possible time elapses (for example, pseudo variation You may comprise so that a decoration symbol may stop at the temporary stop timing of the 1st time.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2206, in step 2214, the drawing display content determining means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) continue the effect mode during the last special game. The display mode {displays the decorative symbols without displaying them or making them difficult to see (not conspicuous) even if they are displayed, and the number of acquired game balls displayed in the previous special game is also continuously displayed. According to the configuration, the player decides to recognize that the special game continues even if the special game is not being executed}, and proceeds to Step 2216.

  Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2300 processing). Transition. Note that, also in the case of No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the design content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2308, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2310. In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decorative symbol change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Then, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2314, in step 2318, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). To be sent).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2322, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2322, in step 2324, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2700). At step 2330, and the process proceeds to step 2330. Note that if the result is No in Step 2322, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board from the main control board M side). It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed has been received). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (deterministic display command) (transmits it to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). To be). Next, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2350 processing). To do. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2310 or Step 2330, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2350).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a V winning detection command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the V prize detection effect display control means SM27 is an effect that notifies the player that the game ball has entered the V prize opening C22. Then, while displaying “V” on the effect display device SG, a command related to the effect of lighting the V lamp V10 is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2356, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a big hit symbol stop command has been received from the main side. . In the case of Yes in step 2356, in step 2358, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 determines that the V winning detection effect (the game ball has entered the V winning opening C22 after a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed). In this example, “V” is displayed on the effect display device SG, and a command related to the effect of lighting the V lamp V10 is set, and the next processing (step 2400) is performed. The process proceeds to (1). In this way, in this embodiment, the V winning detection effect is executed even at the big hit related to the main game symbol, and the consistency of the presentation with the big win related to the V winning is ensured. In case of big hits related to the main game symbol. Actually, since no game ball has entered the V winning opening C22, the V winning detection effect may not be executed. Even in the case of No in step 2356, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406 and step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. A big hit start display is performed on the SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of the big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2412. Note that if the result in Step 2402 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2412.

  Next, in Step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of acquired game balls on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and Based on the type of jackpot, etc., it may be executed as necessary). Note that the number of acquired game balls displayed in this process is the total from the special game related to the first main game side in the normal game state until all the hold on the second main game side is consumed in the normal game state. The number of game balls acquired (the total number of game balls acquired during the Renso).

  Next, in step 2420, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2421, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs display appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2422, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700). . Note that if the answer is No in Step 2404 or Step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a timing chart according to the game progress from the first main game big win winning in the present embodiment. In particular, after the first main game big hit symbol is stopped in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the special game is executed twice, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the action diagram in the case of winning the small hit related to the second main game It is. In this operational diagram, the variable fixed time is shown only for a long time (30 seconds in this example), and is not shown for a short time (0.2 seconds in this example). In this operation diagram, it is assumed that the timing is switched from left-handed to right-handed after timing 1, and thereafter the right-handed game ball is always continuously fired (one shot at an interval of about 0.6 seconds). .

  First, in the situation of a non-time-reduced gaming state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the 4R special game (the first grand prize winning) is triggered by the fact that the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol “7A”. A special game related to the opening of the mouth C10) is executed.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the execution of the special game is completed, and the game state is changed to the time-reduced game state due to the completion of the special game on the first main game side. Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the variable fixed time for a long time (30 seconds in this example) starts when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol “BK”. Is done. In the present embodiment, the maximum number (four) of the second main game hold can be generated almost certainly by the long variable fixed time.

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the small hit game related to the stopped small hit symbol “BK” is started when the variable fixed time has ended. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, during the small hit game being executed, the game balls are stored in the sorting role C23 in the second big prize opening C20, and the discharge related to the small hit game being executed is performed. During the waiting time, the sorting combination C23 moves to the second position to enter the V prize opening C22. The V winning detection effect described above is executed by entering the V winning opening C22. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the special game of 15R is executed in response to the end of the small hit game and the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the special game of 15R is completed, the special game is a special game related to the second main game, and the small hit game winning that the special game has been won Due to the fact that the gaming state at the time is the time-reduced gaming state, the gaming state becomes the non-time-reduced gaming state. In addition, the variation of the second main game symbol is started.

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol “BK”, the small hit game related to “BK” is started. Since the gaming state is a non-time-reduced gaming state, the variable fixed time related to “BK” is a short time (in this example, 0.2 seconds). Next, at the timings 9 and 10 in the figure, similarly to the timings 5 and 6 in the above-described figure, the game ball is entered into the V winning opening C22, the small hit game is ended, and the special game is started. The

  Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the special game of 15R is completed, the special game is a special game related to the second main game, and the small hit game winning is determined to be won by the special game. Due to the fact that the gaming state at that time is the non-time-saving gaming state, the gaming state becomes the time-saving gaming state. In addition, the variation of the second main game symbol is started.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the small win winning probability related to the second main game is set to a high probability (about 1/6 in this example), and the small hit game is in progress. Is configured so that a game ball can be almost certainly entered into the V winning opening C22, and after the special game related to the small hit is completed based on the game state at the time of winning the small hit related to the second main game. By configuring the game state to be determined, first, in the case of winning the big win related to the first main game, in the time-reduced game state after the end of the big win, the “small win related to the second main game → V prize winning” "Special game related to mouth C22" will be won, and the second main game suspension that has occurred up to the maximum number (4 in this example) in the time-reduced gaming state will be related to the V prize opening C22 Turn off in non-time-reduced gaming state after special game ends By being, a new winner of the "special game according to the Koatari → V winning hole C22 according to the second main game" is the ability to automatically expected. In other words, every time a small hit is won before all the suspensions relating to the second main game remaining in the non-time-reduced gaming state are exhausted, two big hits are given to the player. It will be possible to realize innovative gameplay.

  Note that the gaming machine in this example may be configured such that the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps counting the current time with a built-in power supply. Here, the real time clock RTC is a mechanism for measuring time provided on the base of the sub-main control unit SM. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) that is independent from the base, and keeps counting even while power is not being supplied to the gaming machine. Based on the current date and time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during a special game won in the time-saving game state (or non-time-saving game state), a win is won for a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more in the second main game hold. It is almost certain that a special game will be executed multiple times after the special game is finished during the execution of the special game when there is a hold scheduled to be performed (in the non-time-saving game state, For example, the effect may be notified to the player using the real-time clock RTC, the date and time when the effect was started. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the actual feeling that an effect that has a low frequency of appearance and that a large amount of balls have been obtained has been allocated at the current timing. The effect may be executed when there is a predetermined number (for example, 3) of winnings in the second main game hold, but the second main game hold. It is desirable that the system is configured not to be executed when a predetermined number (for example, three) or more jackpots are scheduled to be won. In addition, since the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of special games can be continuously executed in response to winning of the small hit, during the special game execution, the big hit in the second main game hold When there is a hold that becomes, an effect that notifies the presence of the hold may not be executed.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, a new game is realized by making the transition tendency (especially, the presence / absence of transition) of the game state after the end of the special game different between the first main game side and the second main game side. However, this new gameplay variation is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration for showing other game play variations different from the present embodiment will be referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Note that the first modification from the present embodiment is a modification based on the present embodiment, but can be applied to other embodiments (in addition to the second embodiment and the second embodiment). I will also add that.

  First, FIG. 30 is a game progress flowchart in the first modification from the present embodiment. A characteristic configuration of the first modified example from the present embodiment is that a plurality of types of time-saving times that can be selected on the first main game side and the second main game side are provided (particularly on the second main game side, It is preferable to provide a large number of short times.) Hereinafter, the game flow shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail.

<Game progress flow 1>
When the player is in the “normal game” (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which the second main game start port B11d is not in an open state, so-called non-electric support state), the player starts the first main game. A game ball is launched by aiming at the mouth A10 (so-called left-handed) to advance the game. Then, when winning a big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, a big hit probability = 1/256), which is triggered by entering the first main game start opening A10, as shown in the figure. After winning the first main game big win, and after the symbol variation of the first main game based on the win is finished (after the big win symbol of the first main game is stopped and displayed), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, 10 rounds of special games are executed (in this example, the first grand prize opening C10 is opened and “15 prize balls” × “9 counts” = “135 balls” is obtained per round. it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> is completed, the “rush challenge zone” shown in the figure (the game state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is likely to be opened, Since the player shifts to the so-called electric support state = short-time state, the player launches a game ball (so-called right-handed) to advance the game by aiming at the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. , It is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 (the winning main lottery on the second main game side and the second main game design triggered by entering the second main game start opening B10) Fluctuations are made). Here, the “rush challenge zone” is the number of times the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol has been changed from the end of the special game executed in <Game progress flow 1>. However, it continues at least until the predetermined number of times is reached, but the number of times set as the predetermined number of times is the first predetermined number of times after the end of the special game executed in <Game progress flow 1> ( In this example, either 7 times or a second predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) is set. {In this example, the ratio at which the first predetermined number is set: the second predetermined number is The ratio to be set is 99: 1. Typically, the number of times determined according to the type related to the jackpot symbol of the first main game symbol stopped and displayed in <Game progress flow 1> is set. By doing so, such a percentage difference (occupancy rate) Configured to occur}.

<Game progress flow 3>
When winning a small lottery on the second main game side (in this example, a small hit probability = 1/15), which is triggered by entering the second main game start opening B10, “ After the second main game symbol change is completed (after the small main symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), one round's worth A small hit game is executed (in this example, the second big prize opening C20 is opened, but when configured as in the present embodiment, the game ball is aimed at the second big prize opening C20. If it is continuously fired, it is almost definite to enter the V winning opening C22). Then, after the end of the small hit game, a predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, 4 rounds or 15 rounds are allocated) Is configured so that such a distribution difference is generated by setting the maximum number of rounds determined according to the type of the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol, The total number of rounds including one round for the second grand prize opening C20 related to the opening and the number of rounds for the first big prize opening C10 relating to the special game executed with the small hit as an opportunity) Big hits (from small hit games to special games triggered by the small hit games are called big hits) (in this example, in special games triggered by the small hit games, the first big prize opening C10 Is open "15 award balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" per round, and if the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, roughly 500 including the game balls earned in the small hit game When the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, approximately 1900 balls including the game balls acquired by the small hit game remain as the player's balls). When a special game is started with a small hit as an opportunity and the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 10R, one round of the small hit game with the opportunity (the second big prize opening C20 is opened) The predetermined maximum round is 10 rounds for 9 rounds of the started special game (the first big prize opening C10 is opened).

<Game progress flow 4>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 3> is completed, the “rush zone” shown in the figure (the game state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is likely to be opened, so-called (Electric support state = short time state), so that the player, by aiming the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d, by firing a game ball (so-called right-handed) to advance the game, It is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 (the entry into the second main game start opening B10 is a chance to win the lottery on the second main game side and change the design of the second main game design) Is done). Here, the “rush zone” indicates the number of times the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol has been changed from the end of the special game executed in <Game progress flow 3>. However, the number of times set as the specific number of times is the first specific number of times after the special game executed in <Game progress flow 3> In the example, 10 times), the second specified number of times (in this example, 20 times), the third specified number of times (in this example, 30 times), the fourth specified number of times (in this example, 50 times) and the second Any one of 5 specific times (in this example, 100 times) is set {in this example, the ratio at which the first number is set: the ratio at which the second number is set: the third number is set Percentage that is set: The fourth number is set Percentage: The fifth number is set Total = 43: 20: 17: 13: 7, which is typically determined according to the type of small hit symbol of the second main game symbol that is stopped and displayed in <Game progress flow 3>. Such a ratio difference (occupancy) is configured by setting the number of times}. Then, under the situation where the “rush zone” continues, <Game progress flow 3> occurs (as shown in the figure, there is an average of 78% probability during the stay in the “rush zone”. In the case of winning the game, the game progress flow 4 is entered, and the game moves to the “rush zone” again, so that the player can acquire a large amount of balls by this loop property.

<Game progress flow 5>
When the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (in this example, 7 times or 100 times) that is the number of times that the “rush challenge zone” can be continued is reached, the normal gaming state (second main game start port electric motor) It is a gaming state in which the accessory B11d is difficult to be in an open state, so-called non-electric support state), but the second upper limit on the second main game side that occurs when triggered by entering the second main game start port B10 Since the (second main game hold upper limit) is “4”, the second main game hold that remains at the time of entering the normal game state (can occur up to the second main game hold upper limit). When <Game progress flow 3> occurs at the time of digestion, it becomes <Game progress flow 4>, and it becomes almost definite to shift to the “rush zone” (when this event is also taken into account, the second main Small win rate on the game side It is described in the drawing). Similarly, when the above-mentioned specific number of times (in this example, any of 10, 20, 30, 50, or 100) that is the number of times that the “rush zone” can be continued is reached, The game state is a normal game state (a game state in which the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is difficult to be in an open state, a so-called non-electric support state), but the game state to the second main game start port B10 is Since the upper limit number (second main game hold upper limit number) on the second main game side that is triggered by entering the ball is “4”, it remains at the time of entering the normal game state (second main game state) (If the <main game progress flow 3> occurs at the time of the second main game side hold digestion, it will become <game progress flow 4>, and it will be abbreviated to move to the “rush zone” again. Deterministic (including this phenomenon) In case, Koatari winning rate in the second main player side is described in the drawing).

<Game progress flow 6>
The second main game side remaining when the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (in this example, 7 times or 100 times), which can be continued in the “rush challenge zone”, is reached and when the normal gaming state is reached If <Game progress flow 3> does not occur at the time of digestion of all the holdings, the process shifts to "normal game" shown in the figure. Similarly, when the above-mentioned specific number of times (in this example, any of 10, 20, 30, 50, or 100) that is the number of times that the “rush zone” can be continued is reached, and normally If <Game progress flow 3> does not occur at the time of digestion of all the pending games on the second main game side remaining at the time of entering the game state, the process proceeds to "normal game" shown in the figure. To do.

<Irregular game progress flow>
In <Game Progress Flow 1>, a small hitting lottery (in this example, a small hit probability = 1/65536) is also performed on the first main game side triggered by entering the first main game start opening A10. When winning the lottery lottery, it becomes the “first main game small winning prize” shown in the figure, and one round of small hit game is executed (for example, even in the small hit game in this case, 2), and the special game for the predetermined maximum number of rounds is executed (because of entering the V winning opening C22) after the small hit game is ended. It is also possible to configure. In addition, when the special game is finished, it is possible to shift to the “rush challenge zone” shown in the figure. Here, the handling in the case of winning the small hit lottery on the first main game side is not particularly limited, but when configured to win with a very low probability as in this example, At the time of execution, it is preferable that the game ball is substantially deterministic to enter the V winning opening C22 if the game balls are continuously launched aiming at the second big winning opening C20. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, a special game for the maximum number of rounds that can be set (for example, 15 rounds) is executed, and the above-mentioned predetermined number of times that can be continued in the “rush challenge zone” is also included. It is preferable to set the maximum number that can be set (for example, 100 times). In the time-saving game state ("Rush Challenge Zone" or "Rush Zone"), winning a big hit with the second main game side as a trigger will increase the main ball. In the time-reduced game state, when the big win on the second main game side is won without going through the small win, the shortest number of times after the end of the special game is set to the maximum number (100 in this example). For example, it is desirable to give priority to (and increase) the number of time reductions relatively after the end of the big hit through the small hit.

  In addition, the configuration of the modified example 1 from the present embodiment is as follows: (1) When the big hit (or small hit) is won at “normal time”, the average value of the number of short times after the big hit ends is the time-saving gaming state ( (Rush Challenge Zone, “Rush Zone”) is less than the average value of the number of short hours after the big hit when winning a big hit (or small hit). (2) For a big hit symbol, The number of short hours after the end of the jackpot is shorter than the case of winning the jackpot (or the jackpot triggered by the jackpot) at the “normal time” ("Rush Challenge Zone", "Rush Zone") (3) When winning the big hit (or small hit) on the second main game side at “normal time” (for example, ,time The average value of the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot is as follows: In the “normal time”, when the big hit (or small hit) on the first main game side is won, it is configured to be larger than the average value of the number of time reductions after the big hit.

  In the first modified example from the present embodiment, when a special game transfer right is acquired (when the big hit symbol is stopped, when the small hit game that has entered the V winning slot C22 during the small hit game ends, etc.) The game may be configured to start by hitting a game ball into the ball opening, and the number of hours after the big hit is determined by entering the game ball into the specific entrance (for example, specific It may be configured to be determined by lottery when a game ball enters the entrance. With this configuration, by visually recognizing the small hit symbol at the time of winning the small hit, the player can determine the number of short times after the big hit ends with the small hit as an opportunity, and the game ball is placed in the V winning opening C22. It is possible to prevent the player from discriminating which is more advantageous when the player enters the ball or not.

  With the configuration as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, regardless of which lottery is caused by the first main game side or the second main game side. In addition, regardless of whether it is caused by winning the big hit lottery or due to the occurrence of a small hit game, after the end of the special game, it will be sure to shift to the so-called electric support state Although it is configured, it is configured to be variable with respect to the period during which the electric support state is maintained, and at least when a small hit game occurs during the period in which the electric support state is maintained, Since the occurrence of the special game is also deterministic, the gameability is whether or not the small hit game can be generated in the period in which the electric support state is maintained. Since the small hit probability is always constant, the longer the period during which the power support state is maintained, the more the game can be created that will create a more favorable situation for the player. It becomes.

  In addition, since it is such a game, it is desirable not to inform the player of the period during which the electric support state can be maintained (in other words, the number of times set after the end of the special game) By having such a configuration, the player can have a sense of expectation for how long the period during which the electric support state is maintained (from the end of the special game to how many changes), and the interest of the game is Will increase. In addition, as an effect related to the number of time reductions, an effect that makes it appear to the player that the number of time reductions has increased may be executed. For example, when the number of time reductions set after the end of the special game is 50 times At the end of the special game, “10 times” is displayed as the shortest remaining time, and the 10th symbol variation (the symbol variation which becomes 0 remaining) (or at the timing before the 10th variation), “ By displaying “+40 times”, it is possible to exemplify an effect that makes it appear as if the number of time reductions has increased. The configuration can be applied to both the “rush challenge zone” and the “rush challenge zone”. For example, when the number of time reductions is 100 in the “rush challenge zone”, the “rush challenge zone” is applicable. At the beginning of “ZONE”, “7 times” is displayed as the remaining number of short times, and “+93” is displayed at the seventh symbol variation (the symbol variation which becomes the remaining zero) (or at the timing before the seventh variation). It may be configured to display “time” (or display the remaining number of short times after displaying “still more”). In addition, when the number of time reductions is 100 times in the “rush challenge zone”, the remaining time reduction times may be displayed as “100 times” from the start of the “rush challenge zone”. From the start of the “rush challenge zone”, “rush zone” may be displayed, and the same effect mode as during the stay in the “rush zone” may be used.

  Further, it may be configured such that the production mode is different between staying in the “rush challenge zone” and staying in the “rush zone” (a production mode that recognizes that the “rush zone” is more profitable is desirable. ) In the “Rush Challenge Zone”, if the number of working hours is 100, the number of working hours is the same as the maximum number of working hours in the “Rush Zone”, which is highly profitable for the player. You may comprise so that the production | presentation similar to during a "rush zone" stay may be performed. Moreover, you may comprise so that both the structure which performs the production | presentation similar to the said "rush zone" stay, and the structure which performs the production | presentation which makes it seem that the number of time reductions mentioned above may be performed, for example, " The production mode executed in the “rush challenge zone” is “production mode A”, the production mode executed in the “rush zone” is “production mode B”, and the number of time reductions is 100 in the “rush challenge zone”. When the “rush challenge zone” starts, “7 times” is displayed as the remaining short number of times, and the effect mode to be executed is set as “effect mode A”, and the seventh symbol variation (remaining 0 times) (Changes in symbols) (or at the timing before the seventh change), “+93 times” is displayed (or “remaining time is displayed after displaying“ more ”), and thereafter The effect is produced, which is the row may be configured to as "representation embodiment B".

  In addition, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the small win winning probability on the second main game side (in this example, both the normal gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are 1/15) is the big winning winning probability in the normal gaming state (In this example, the winning rate is 10 times or more of 1/256). In other words, as a technique for increasing the frequency of occurrence of special games in conventional pachinko machines, there is a so-called probability variation function (a function that increases the jackpot winning probability itself), but with this probability varying function the jackpot winning probability It is customary that the upper limit that can be increased is less than 10 times the original jackpot winning probability, and if a configuration such as the modified example 1 from this embodiment is adopted, a special frequency that exceeds the upper limit is special. It is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of games.

  In the first modification from the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, when the big win on the first main game side is won, the number of time reductions after the big win ends is the same as on the second main game side. (The distribution of the number of times) may be used (the configuration may be configured so as to shift to the “rush zone”). In addition, the number of short hours after the end of the big hit on the second main game side (including after the big hit with the small hit as an opportunity) It is good also as the same frequency (frequency allocation).

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
Here, in the first modification from the present embodiment, as described in <Game progress flow 4>, the “rush zone” (the game state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easily opened, The so-called electric support state = short time state) is the number of times the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol has been changed from the end of the special game executed in <Game progress flow 3>. However, it is configured to continue at least until the specific number of times is reached, but the number of times set as the specific number of times is typically the second that is stopped and displayed in <Game progress flow 3>. There may be a case where a predetermined number of times is set according to the type of the small game symbol of the main game symbol. In this case, the player confirms the type related to the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol displayed in a stopped state, so that the set schedule will be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit of the second main game symbol. If the specific number of times is determined in advance and the specific number of times (that is, the number of short-time continuations scheduled to be set) is relatively small, a game ball is inserted into the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game Playing a game that does not allow it (so-called stop-and-shoot strategy, the player can get a new chance to stop and display what has a relatively large number of short-time continuations) There is concern about the situation in which the above payout rate is derived. Of course, there are several methods for avoiding such a situation. For example, when the number of short-time continuations is relatively small, the number of winning balls (for example, the maximum number of rounds) obtained by special games is increased. Alternatively, it may be configured such that only game balls that have entered the second big prize opening C20 immediately after the start of the small hit game are guided to the V prize opening C22. However, as a reverse idea, since it is possible to incorporate the above-described stopping and capturing strategy as one gameability, a configuration for exemplifying such gameplay is a modified example 2 from the present embodiment. Hereinafter, only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail. Note that the modified example 2 from the present embodiment is a modification based on the present embodiment, but can be applied to other embodiments (the present embodiment is of course also the second and subsequent embodiments). I will also add that.

  First, FIG. 31 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is Step 2550 (Modification 2), the purpose of which is a game state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is likely to be in an open state, and a so-called electric support state = shortening state. It is configured to notify the player of the remaining period that can be continued. That is, in Step 2550 (Modification 2), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the remaining short time display control process described later, and proceeds to Step 2050.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the remaining short time display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2550 (Modification 2) in FIG. 31 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. First, in step 2552, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the current time reduction gaming state (so-called electric support state). In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for notifying the remaining number of short times (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2050). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552, in step 2556, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for erasing the remaining short time notification (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub-sub control unit SS side) Is transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2050). In the second modified example from the present embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state), it is configured to notify the remaining number of short times, and, as will be described later, the second main game symbol small hit If the symbol is stopped and displayed, the number of times that are scheduled to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit of the second main game symbol will be notified, but based on the remaining number of times that are notified by this process The player can determine whether or not to enter the second grand prize opening C20 (however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining number of short times may be not notified).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a right-handed instruction display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2050 in FIG. 31 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. A change from the present embodiment is Step 2600 (Modification 2), and its purpose is to execute a notification control process for incorporating the above-described stop-attack strategy as one game. That is, if it is a time-saving game state (so-called electric support state) in step 2052, in step 2600 (odd 2), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 executes a time-short / middle-right-handed instruction display control process described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the time-short / right-handed instruction display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2600 (Modification 2) in FIG. 33 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. First, in step 2602, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and is currently in a small hit (because it is in a so-called electric support state, the second main game symbol is mainly hit) It is determined whether or not it is changing. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the small hit symbol related to the change is the short-time short-time small hit symbol (the small hit symbol). This is a small hit symbol with a relatively small number of time reductions given after the end of the special game, and for example, in the first modification from this embodiment, for example, the number of time reductions related to the short time short number small hit symbol Is 10 to 30 times, and the short time number of long and short times is 50 times or 100 times). In the case of Yes in step 2604, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2606, and the remaining short time count (the same as that notified in step 2554) is the notification mode switching value. It is determined whether or not it is the same value as the denominator of the small hit probability on the second main game side, which is 15 in this example. The notification mode switching value may be the same value as the second main game suspension upper limit number (4 in this example) without any problem even if it is changed. In the case of Yes in step 2606, in step 2608, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 does not prompt the player to enter the prize winning prize winning selection effect execution command (second prize winning opening C20, and eventually V winning prize opening C22). A command related to information indicating that the effect is to be executed) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2700), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100). On the other hand, if step 2602, step 2604 or step 2606 is No, in step 2610, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 displays a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display (second winning prize). A command (a command related to information to execute an effect for encouraging the player to enter the entrance C20 and thus the V winning opening C22) is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a display image diagram of the winning prize winning selection effect. As shown in this image diagram, when the special winning opening winning selection effect is executed, first, a display for prompting the player to stop the launch of the game ball, “Please stop firing”, is executed. Next, after the message “Please stop firing” is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), “V. When a game ball is made to enter the winning opening C22, a display for notifying the player of the number of short times scheduled to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit is executed. Therefore, the player selects whether or not to enter the second grand prize opening C20 based on the number of short hours scheduled to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit and the number of remaining short hours notified. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to confirm with the number of times that are scheduled to be set, or to obtain a chance to obtain a new stop display of those with a relatively large number of times of shortening. can do.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute the big winning opening winning selection effect during the change of the small hit symbol, but is not limited to this, the small hit It may be configured to execute at the small hit start demonstration time related to the symbol. In such a case, the small hit start demonstration time of the small hit symbol at which the big prize winning selection effect can be executed is large. It is desirable to make the time longer than the small hit start demonstration time of the small hit symbol in which the winning opening winning selection effect is not executed. Further, it may be configured that the big winning opening winning selection effect is executed at the small hit start demonstration time only when the notification mode switching value is not provided and the small hit start demonstration time is relatively long. . With such a configuration, the player can select whether or not to make the game ball enter the second big prize opening C20 (and hence the V prize opening C22) during the long-time small hit start demonstration. (If you do not want to enter the ball, stop playing the game ball). In addition, when a so-called hold prefetch process is executed, and there is a hold that becomes a small hit in the hold, a configuration that can perform the big winning opening prize selection effect in advance at the timing before the fluctuation related to the small hit (In other words, it is configured to notify the fact that a small hit will occur in the future and the number of time reductions scheduled to be set in the future before the hold that will be won in the small hit is exhausted ).

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a special game triggered by a small hit and the number of short times given after the special game is ended If the number of award balls that can be obtained in a special game triggered by a small hit is relatively large for each small bonus symbol that triggers a game, the number of short hours after the special game is relatively reduced, When the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a special game triggered by a small hit is relatively small, the number of short hours after the special game may be adjusted to be relatively large. With such a configuration, when a small winning symbol that wins a special game to which a small number of times are given is won, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second big prize opening C20 (the game ball of the game ball) (Suspending the launch) will not be advantageous to the player, and the ball payout rate will be greatly different depending on the mode of the game ball fired during the small hit game (whether it keeps firing or is interrupted) Can be configured so that there is no launch mode that significantly increases the appearance rate, even if the player proceeds the game in the launch mode of the game ball according to his taste This will not occur and the fairness of the game will be maintained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the present embodiment, when the remaining short time is less than or equal to the notification mode switching value, even when winning a small winning prize, the big prize winning prize selection effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state), it may be configured to always be able to execute the big winning opening prize selection effect. In the case of such a configuration, the symbol variation for the second main game side that remains when the symbol variation for the number of time reductions ends and the time-saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state ( In other words, for the player, when the game is on hold, which is the last chance to generate a small hit, if the small win is won, the prize winning selection effect is not executed (that is, the player is prompted to enter the V winning slot C22). May be configured to give priority to the other).

(Second Embodiment)
Here, in this embodiment, depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit or the small win, after the end of the special game (including both the special game related to the main game symbol and the special game related to the V winning opening C22) Although the game state is determined, the method for determining the game state is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration that is a method for determining a gaming state after the end of a special game different from the present embodiment is referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the second embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied in the second embodiment.

  First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 7 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the maximum number of second main game holds is changed to one.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that the small win winning probability on the first main game side and the second main game side is changed, and the big win symbol is changed to both the first main game side and the second main game side. Two types are provided, and two types of small hit symbols on the second main game side are provided. In the second embodiment, the winning lottery on the second main game side is configured so that almost a small win is won. By configuring in this way, even if the maximum number of second main game holds described above with reference to FIG. 31 is set to 1, it is possible to win a small hit in the variation related to the one hold. In addition, the game state after the jackpot ends is different (whether it becomes a time-reduced gaming state or a non-time-reduced gaming state) depending on the jackpot symbol that triggered the winning of the jackpot.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1760 (second) to step 1764 (second), the purpose of which is to end the special game depending on the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol related to the executed special game. It is configured to determine a later gaming state. That is, in step 1760 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and after the special game related to the big hit symbol (the first main game side and the second main game side and Whether or not) is included. In the case of Yes in step 1760 (second), in step 1762, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the current stop symbol is a short-time transition jackpot symbol (time reduction after the end of the special game) It is a jackpot symbol that will shift to the gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1762 (second), the process proceeds to step 1755 (becomes time-reduced gaming state), whereas in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1800) (does not enter the time-reduced gaming state). )

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1760 (second), in step 1764 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and triggered the special game that ended. The small hit symbol related to the small hit game executed at the timing of the winning shift is a short-time transition small hit symbol (after the special game related to the V winning in the small hit game related to the small hit game is entered, it shifts to the time-reduced gaming state. In this example, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol is 7AK or 7BK). If Yes in step 1764, the process proceeds to step 1755 (becomes time-reduced gaming state), whereas if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1800) (does not enter time-reduced gaming state).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2200 in FIG. 22 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2218 (second). The purpose of this is when the time-saving game state (so-called electric support state) is entered after execution of a certain special game, the time-saving game state. While (so-called electric support state) continues, it is to execute an effect related to the content of the effect displayed at the time of execution of the special game. That is, in the case of No in step 2206 or step 2208, in step 2218 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n continues to display the effect content of the variation in the previous special game. The battle standby effect mode (the effect image of this effect will be described later) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2216. In the second embodiment, the decoration symbol is not displayed in step 2218 (second). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a decoration symbol may be displayed. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the display of the decorative symbol is smaller (or less conspicuous) than the display of the decorative symbol to be displayed in step 2210.

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 22 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is Step 2650 (second), and the purpose is that when a special game is continuously generated in a short period of time, the special game that is generated continuously is obtained. It is to perform the production related to the story. That is, after setting a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds, the number of winning prizes and the number of winning game balls in step 2412, in step 2650 (second), the background effect display control means SM23 is executing a special game, which will be described later. The effect control process is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the special game execution effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. 39 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game related to the first main game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the stop symbol is the first main game short transition big hit symbol {time shortening game state (so-called electricity It is a jackpot symbol that triggers the transition to (supporting state), and in this example, it is determined whether it is 7A}. In addition, since it shifts to a time-reduced game state (so-called electric support state) even after the end of the special game triggered by the first main game short transition small hit symbol “7AK”, the process proceeds to step 2656 (first main game small hit The design is only “7AK”). In the case of Yes in step 2654, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect that notifies that the battle entry challenge success effect (the transition to the time-reduced game state is to be made) as the effect during the special game. The effect image of this effect will be described later. Next, in step 2660, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (a counter that is referred to when determining the effect during the special game via the second main game side small hit) to the battle continuation counter SM23c. In this example, 2) is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 2661. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2654, in other words, the stop symbol is a big hit symbol that does not trigger the transition to the first main game short non-transition symbol {time-reduced game state (so-called electric support state). In this example, 2A } {If you win “2A” with a small hit, you will move to a time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state), and in Step 2654 you will get a}}, in Step 2658 you will have a background effect. The display control means SM23 executes the battle entry challenge failure effect (the effect of notifying the fact that it will not shift to the time-saving game state, and the effect image of this effect will be described later) as the effect during the special game. Then, the process proceeds to step 2662. Note that if the answer is No in step 2652, the process proceeds to step 2662.

  Next, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the special game related to the second main game (especially, the special effect via the small hit on the second main game side). It is determined whether or not (game) is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2662, in step 2664, the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the battle continuation counter SM23c. Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the battle continuation counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 2666, in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the small winning symbol that triggered the transition of the special game is the second main game short transition small. It is determined whether or not the winning symbol {a small winning symbol that triggers the transition to the special game and triggers the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state), which is 7BK in this example]. In addition, after the special game related to the second main game short transition big hit symbol “7B”, in order to shift to the time-saving game state (so-called electric support state), the process proceeds to step 2670 and the second main game short non-shift big hit symbol. After the special game related to “2B” is finished, the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state) is not entered, so that the procedure goes to Step 2673. In the case of Yes in step 2668, in step 2670, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect that informs that the transition to the first battle victory effect (time-reduced game state will be made) as the effect during the special game. The effect image of this effect will be described later. Next, in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (2 in this example) to the battle continuation counter SM23c, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2420).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2668, in other words, if the stop symbol is not the second main game short transition small hit symbol (in this example, the small hit symbol is 2BK), in step 2684, the background effect display control is performed. The means SM23 executes the first battle non-winning effect as an effect during the special game (the effect of notifying that the time-saving game state will not be shifted, and the effect image of this effect will be described later). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2420). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2666, in step 2676, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the small winning symbol that triggered the transition of the special game is the second main game short time. It is determined whether or not it is a transition small hit symbol {a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to the special game and triggers a transition to the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state), which is 7BK in this example]. In addition, after the special game related to the second main game short transition big hit symbol “7B” is finished, in order to shift to the time-saving game state (so-called electric support state), the process proceeds to step 2678 and the second main game short non-shift big hit symbol. After the special game related to “2B” is completed, the process does not shift to the time-saving game state (so-called electric support state), so that the process shifts to Step 2682. In the case of Yes in step 2676, in step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect informing that the transition to the second battle victory effect (time-reduced game state will be made) as the effect during the special game. The effect image of this effect will be described later. Next, in step 2680, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (2 in this example) to the battle continuation counter SM23c, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2420). On the other hand, if No in step 2676, in other words, if the stop symbol is not the second main game short transition small hit symbol (in this example, the small hit symbol is 2BK), in step 2682, the background effect display control is performed. The means SM23 executes the second battle non-winning effect (the effect of notifying that the time-saving game state will not be shifted, and the effect image of this effect will be described later) as the effect during the special game. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2420). Even in the case of No in step 2662, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2420).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a game progress flowchart in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the game flow shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail.

<Game progress flow 1>
When the player is in the “normal game” (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which the second main game start port B11d is not in an open state, so-called non-electric support state), the player starts the first main game. A game ball is launched by aiming at the mouth A10 (so-called left-handed) to advance the game. Then, when winning a big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, a big hit probability = 1/234), which is triggered by entering the first main game start opening A10, as shown in the figure. After winning the first main game big win, and after the symbol change of the first main game based on the win is finished (after the big win symbol of the first main game is stopped), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, 8 rounds of special games are executed (in this example, the first grand prize opening C10 is opened and “15 prize balls” × “9 counts” = “135 balls” is obtained per round. it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> ends, the selection rate of 33% (for example, the first main game big hit symbol “7A that will shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the special game” ”And the first main game big hit symbol“ 2A ”that will not shift to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game, and“ 7A ”:“ 2A ”= 1: 2 is selected) The “battle mode” (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which it is likely to be in an open state, so-called electric support state = short time state), so that the player can start the second main game By launching a game ball aiming at the mouthpiece B11d (so-called right-handed) and progressing the game, it is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start port B10 (second main game). Triggered by entering the starting gate B10 , Spruce lottery and symbol variation of the second main game symbols at the second main player side is performed). When the special game related to the first main game big hit symbol is not completed, the game shifts to the “normal game” shown in the figure.

<Game progress flow 3>
Thereafter, the player enters the “battle mode”, and the player launches a game ball (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d, and advances the game. Small win by symbol change of the 2nd main game symbol related to the entrance to the start opening B10 (in the winning lottery related to the 2nd main game, it wins at 1 / 1.01, it will be a near-winning winning) In addition to winning, one second main game hold occurs during the symbol change (the second main game hold upper limit is one). 2 main game hold may occur). Further, after the symbol variation of the second main game symbol based on the winning is completed (after the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), one round of small hit game is executed ( In this example, the second grand prize opening C20 is opened. However, if the game ball is continuously launched aiming at the second big prize opening C20 when configured as in the present embodiment, V It is substantially definitive to enter the winning opening C22). Then, after the end of the small hit game, a predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, 4 rounds or 15 rounds are allocated) Is configured so that such a distribution difference is generated by setting the maximum number of rounds determined according to the type of the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol, The total number of rounds of one round that the second big prize opening C20 related to the opening and the number of rounds that the first big prize opening C10 related to the special game that is executed with the small hit as an opening) A big hit (from a small hit game to a special game triggered by the small hit game is called a big hit) is executed (in this example, in the special game triggered by the small hit game, the first big prize opening C10 is Released, “15 prize balls” × “9 counts” = “135 balls” can be obtained per round, and if the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, approximately 500 including the game balls obtained by the small hit game are When the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, approximately 1900 balls including the game balls acquired by the small hit game remain as the player's balls.

<Game progress flow 4>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 3> is completed, the selection rate of 33% (for example, the second main game small hit symbol “that will shift to the time-reduced game state after completion of the special game” 7BK ”and the second main game small hit symbol“ 2BK ”that will not shift to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game, and is selected at 7BK: 2BK = 1: 2) The same action as the game progress flow 3> (the second main game symbol is changed based on the remaining second main game hold, and one new second main game hold occurs) . On the other hand, if the transition to the time-reduced game state is not made after the special game ends, the second main game symbol change is executed based on the remaining second main game hold (because it is a so-called non-electric support state). , 2nd main game suspension does not occur newly), small wins in the symbol variation (in the winning lottery related to the 2nd main game, wins at 1 / 1.01, it will almost win a small win) When winning, “small hit → entering V winning award C22 → special game” is executed as described above. After the special game is finished, the game state is determined based on the small hit symbol in the same manner. If the game state is a time-reduced game state, the same as in <Game progress flow 3> again. (The symbol change of the second main game symbol related to the ball entering the second main game start opening B10 is executed, and one second main game hold is newly generated). On the other hand, when the game state is not the time-reduced game state, the second main game hold does not exist, so that the process shifts to the “normal game” shown in the figure. Thus, in the “battle mode”, it is almost guaranteed that “small hit → entering the V prize opening C22 → special game” will be executed twice after the entry, and after the two special games are completed. In any of the above, when the game shifts to the time-reduced game state, the “small hit → entering the V winning opening C22 → special game” is executed twice, in the non-time-reduced game state and the second main game hold. Until it becomes none, it is a gameability in which a state advantageous to the player loops. It should be noted that the number of times that the execution of “small hit → entering the V winning opening C22 → special game” is almost assured is equivalent to one symbol variation related to entering the second main game start opening B10 and the symbol variation. Although it is configured to be twice with one second main game hold that occurred in the inside, it is not limited to this, and the upper limit number of second main game hold is set to three and the “small hit → V prize” The number of times that the execution of “entering the entrance C22 → special game” is almost guaranteed may be four times, and a state advantageous to the player may be a game property in which a special game is generated four times and looped in one set (in that case) For example, the rate of entry into “battle mode” in <game progress flow 2> may be 50%, and the rate of re-entry into “battle mode” in <game progress flow 4> may be 25%. Good).

<Irregular game progress flow>
In <Game progress flow 1>, a small hitting lottery (in this example, a small hitting probability = 1/1024) is also performed on the first main game side triggered by entering the first main game starting port A10. When winning the lottery lottery, it becomes the “first main game small winning prize” shown in the figure, and one round of small hit game is executed (for example, even in the small hit game in this case, 2), and the special game for the predetermined maximum number of rounds is executed (because of entering the V winning opening C22) after the small hit game is ended. It is also possible to configure. Further, when the special game ends, it is possible to shift to the “battle mode” shown in the figure. Here, the handling in the case of winning the small hit lottery on the first main game side is not particularly limited, but when configured to win with a very low probability as in this example, At the time of execution, it is preferable that the game ball is substantially deterministic to enter the V winning opening C22 if the game balls are continuously launched aiming at the second big winning opening C20. In addition, after the small hit game is completed, it is preferable that a special game for the maximum number of rounds that can be set (for example, 15 rounds) is executed.

  Next, FIG. 42 is an image diagram relating to special game effects and the like in the second embodiment. This figure exemplifies the flow of a special game related to whether or not to enter the “battle mode” detailed in FIG. 41 and a series of games executed during the “battle mode”. . First, during a special game executed in accordance with <Game progress flow 1>, when the special game is scheduled to shift to a time-reduced game state (the first main game side jackpot symbol was “7A”) ) Is executed as a special game stage production (for example, a production where the main character discovers a treasure chest and an enemy who will compete in the battle production appears from the treasure chest) After the special game is over, the game shifts to a time-saving game state (so-called electric support state). That is, the “battle entry challenge success effect” is an effect of notifying the player that the special game executed in accordance with <Game progress flow 1> will shift to the time-reduced game state after the special game ends. It becomes contents. On the other hand, if it is not planned to shift to the time-reduced gaming state after the special game ends (when the first main game side jackpot symbol is “2A”), the effect during the special game is “Battle entry challenge failure” “Direction” (for example, although the main character finds the treasure chest but the paper in which “Ska” is written appears from the treasure chest) is executed, the time-saving game state is not shifted to after the special game ends. In other words, the “battle entry challenge failure effect” is an effect of notifying the player that the game will not shift to the time-reduced game state after the special game is completed during the special game executed in accordance with <Game progress flow 1>. It becomes contents.

  Next, in the case of transitioning to a time-reduced gaming state (so-called electric support state) in accordance with <Game progress flow 2>, the second main gaming symbol fluctuates when triggered by entering the second main gaming starting port B10. , One second main game hold occurs during the symbol change. In this case, during the symbol change, a “battle standby effect” (an effect informing that the occurrence of a special game via the small hit game is in a committed state, for example, an effect in which the main character and enemies are concerned) Will be executed.

  Next, when a special game is generated via a small hit game in accordance with <Game Progress Flow 3>, and the small hit symbol is the second main game short transition small hit symbol {the transition trigger of the special game and time saving In the case of 7BK} in the present example, when the special game is being executed, the “first battle victory effect” (the appearance of the main character is After the projection, the main character attacks the enemy and destroys it), and after the special game is over, the game shifts to a time-saving game state (so-called electric support state). In other words, the “first battle victory effect” is an effect of notifying the player that the special game executed in accordance with <Game progress flow 3> will shift to the time-reduced game state after the special game ends. It becomes contents. On the other hand, when a special game is generated via the small hit game in accordance with <Game Progress Flow 3>, and the small hit symbol is not the second main game short transition small hit symbol, during execution of the special game, “First battle unwinning effect” (the effect that the enemy is projected and the enemy tries to attack the hero) is executed, and after the special game is over, the time-saving game state (so-called electric support state) must not be entered. It becomes. That is, the “first battle non-winning effect” is a notice to the player that during the special game executed in accordance with <Game progress flow 3>, the player does not enter the time-reduced game state after the special game ends. The contents of the production.

  Here, when the “first battle victory effect” is executed, the “battle standby effect” (the occurrence of the special game via the small hit game) is performed during the subsequent fluctuation of the second main game symbol. This is an effect of notifying that it is in a committed state, for example, returning to an effect in which the main character and the enemy are glaring. The enemy type executed at this timing may be configured to be different from the enemy type displayed in the “first battle victory effect”. On the other hand, when the “first battle non-winning effect” is executed, a further “battle standby effect” (the occurrence of a special game via a small hit game) occurs during the subsequent fluctuation of the second main game symbol. It is an effect that informs that it is in a promised state and also an effect that informs that the second main game hold has been exhausted. For example, an enemy displayed in the “first battle unvicted effect” attacks the hero Production) is executed.

  Next, when the game state is not shifted to the time-reduced game state (so-called electric support state) according to <Game progress flow 4> (that is, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is based on the remaining second main game suspension). When the special game via the small hit game occurs in accordance with <Game progress flow 3> in the case where the second main game suspension does not occur and the small hit symbol is shifted to the second main game short time If the bonus game is {small bonus symbol that triggers the transition of the special game and triggers the transition to the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state) and is 7BK in this example} Is the “second battle victory effect” (the effect that the main character prevents the enemy from attacking, and then the effect that the main character attacks the enemy and defeats the enemy is executed), and the time is shortened after the special game ends. Game state (Iwayu So that the transition to electric support state). That is, the “second battle victory effect” is the effect content for notifying the player that the game will be shifted to the time-reduced game state after the special game, as in the case of the “first battle victory effect”. The content of the production is related to the “first battle non-winning production” in a story. In addition, when the game does not shift to the time-reduced game state (so-called electric support state) in accordance with <Game progress flow 4> (that is, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is executed based on the remaining second main game hold) And when the second main game suspension does not occur newly), when a special game is generated via the small hit game in accordance with <Game progress flow 3>, and the small hit symbol is small in the second main game short transition time If it is not a winning symbol, during the execution of the special game, the “second battle non-winning effect” (the effect that the hero is defeated by the enemy) is executed, and after the special game ends, the time-reduced game state (so-called electric game) It will not shift to the support state. That is, the “second battle non-winning effect” is the effect content for notifying the player that the time-saving game state will not be shifted to after the special game is completed, as in the case of the “first battle non-winning effect”. However, the content of the production is related to the “first battle unwinning production” in a story. When the “second battle victory effect” is executed, the “battle standby effect” (the special game via the small hit game is guaranteed to occur during the subsequent fluctuation of the second main game symbol. It is an effect that informs that the state has been made, and for example, it returns to an effect in which the main character and the enemy stare. The enemy type executed at this timing may be configured to be different from the enemy type displayed in the “second battle victory effect”. On the other hand, when the “second battle non-winning effect” is executed, since the game returns to the normal game, the effect is switched to the effect for the normal game state.

  By configuring in this way, in the second embodiment, a seamless effect that the player continues to be in an advantageous state unless the hero is defeated by the enemy is special during the change of the main game symbol and during the small hit game It can be executed during the game. That is, it begins with “Battle rush challenge success production” (production corresponding to the execution of the special game that occurred on the first main game side), and “Battle standby production” (After the execution of the special game, via the small hit game Production that corresponds to the occurrence of a new special game) → “first battle victory production” (production that corresponds to the execution of the new special game) → “battle standby production” or “battle standby” "Direction" (Direction corresponding to the time from the end of execution of the special game until the occurrence of a new special game via the small hit game) → "First battle non-winning effect" (corresponding during execution of the new special game) Production) → “Battle standby production” (production corresponding to the occurrence of additional special games via the small hit game after the completion of execution of the new special game) → “Second battle victory production” (the further special While the game is running As long as the response was directed) → seamless production to be a "battle waiting game effect" continues to occur, it is the it is possible to be advantageous state to notify the subject that has continued for the player.

  In the second embodiment, since the upper limit on the second main game side is set to one, the game is looped in one set of two occurrences of the special game, but the second main game side There is no problem even if the upper limit of the number of holds is changed, for example, the number of the upper limit on the second main game side is set to three, and the game is looped in one set of four occurrences of special games. May be provided in four stages (first to fourth battle victory effects and first to fourth battle non-win effects). In such a case, as examples of the effects of each battle effect, the first battle victory effect, the effect that the hero's figure is projected, the first battle unvicted effect, the effect that the enemy's appearance is reflected, the second battle Directing the hero's attack, directing the 2nd battle unvictorious, enemies attacking, rendering the 3rd battle winning directing, defending the hero against the enemy's attack, 3rd battle unwinning directing, the hero It is possible to use an effect in which an enemy attacks, a 4th battle victory effect, an effect in which the main character rises, an effect in which the fourth battle does not win, an effect in which the main character does not stand up and loses.

  In addition, during the “Battle Mode” stay, winning the jackpot triggered by the second main game side wins will be the flow to increase the main ball, but during the “Battle Mode” stay In the case of winning the big hit on the second main game side without going through the small win, the presentation may be executed in a mode (specific mode) different from the case where the big win is triggered by the small win. Well, for example, when “7B” is won, an effect such as “the main character pays out a deadly technique” may be executed. It should be noted that the performance of the specific mode is suitable to be executed when the player is highly profitable (in this example, when the big win related to “7B” is won), and when the big hit becomes the maximum profit (for example, round It is more preferable that the number is the largest and the game is executed on the jackpot that shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot is finished. In addition, even when a big win is won with a small win, the effect of the specific mode may be executed. For example, the maximum number of rounds on the second main game side ( In this example, a big hit (15R) round is executed (among the small bonus symbol 7BK, the maximum number of rounds executed at the big hit triggered by winning the small hit is 15R, the small hit symbol is 7BK-1, the maximum The small hit symbol with 4R rounds is 7BK-2, and in this example, it may be configured such that the effect of the specific mode is executed when winning a big hit with 7BK-1 as an opportunity. When configured in such a manner, it is configured to shift to a time-reduced gaming state after the big hit when the maximum number of rounds are executed (not only the big winning game ball but also the gaming state after the big hit ends). It is also desirable that it be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the small win winning probability related to the second main game is higher than the probability of this embodiment (probability of winning every variation), Occurrence of one special game is almost deterministic for one hold related to the second main game. Therefore, when the upper limit for holding the second main game is one, when the time-saving gaming state is entered, one holding for the second main game occurs → (Symbol change that is almost a small hit) is executed → During the executed symbol change, a new one on-hold related to the second main game is generated, and then a special game is played twice. The occurrence of is almost deterministic. Therefore, even if the state is shifted to the non-time-reduced gaming state after execution of the first special game, if the state is shifted to the time-reduced gaming state after execution of the second special game, the special game 2 is further increased. Since the occurrence of the game is almost deterministic, as long as the transition to the time-saving game state continues after the execution of one of the two special games, a special game will be given to the player for a long time. (Of course, this example is only an example, and if the number of suspension upper limit related to the second main game and the rate of transition to the time-saving game state after execution of the special game are changed) , It is possible to achieve a variety of appearances).

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, by shifting to the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state) after the execution of the special game related to the first main game symbol, “small hit → V winning opening C22 It is configured so that it is almost guaranteed that a game advantageous to the player, “entering → special game” will be executed twice, and during the game advantageous to the player, the time-reduced game after the special game is completed again If the state can be changed, it is almost guaranteed that a game advantageous to the player will be executed twice, creating a novel gameability such that a game advantageous to the player loops in one set twice. Will be able to. In addition, by performing a seamless performance during the period in which the player continues to be given out, it is possible to feel that the number of game balls is constantly increasing during the period, and the fun of the game is enhanced. .

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, based on the stopped big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped, the game after the special game is executed after that Although the state is determined, the method for determining the game state after the special game is finished is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration that is a method for determining a gaming state after the end of a special game different from the second embodiment is a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below. To do. Furthermore, since the first modification from the second embodiment is also a modification based on the second embodiment, any configuration shown in the second embodiment is a first modification from the second embodiment. Note that it is applicable.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1 that manages the number of times related to the first main game and the second time that manages the number of times related to the second main game are stored. It has a main game short-time counter MP52c-2.

  First, FIG. 43 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is that three small hit symbols are provided on the second main game side. By configuring in this manner, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the big hit symbol is based on the type of the stopped big hit symbol or the small hit symbol and the gaming state when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped. Alternatively, the game state after the end of the special game related to the small hit symbol can be determined (details will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1500 in FIG. 12 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1511 (second modification 1) to step 1520 (second modification 1), that is, in step 1511 (second modification 1), the specific game control means MP50 Referring to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not the stopped main game symbol is the first main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1511 (second variable 1), in step 1512 (second variable 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1, and the counter value is greater than zero. It is determined whether or not the value is large. In the case of Yes in step 1512 (second variation 1), in step 1514 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1. Next, in step 1516 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first main game short time counter MP52c-1, and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. If Yes in step 1516 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1521 (second modification 1).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1511 (second variation 1), in step 1518 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the second main game short time counter MP52c-2, and the counter value is It is determined whether or not the value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1518 (second variation 1), in step 1519 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the second main game short time counter MP52c-2. Next, in step 1520 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the second main game short time counter MP52c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. If Yes in step 1520 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1521 (second modification 1).

  Next, in step 1521 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets (zero clears) the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1. Next, in step 1522 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets (zero clears) the second main game short time counter MP52c-2, and proceeds to step 1508. If step 1512 (second modification 1), step 1516 (second modification 1), step 1518 (second modification 1) or step 1520 (second modification 1) is No, the next process (step 1600) is performed. The process proceeds to (1). Thus, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when either the counter value of the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1 or the counter value of the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2 becomes 0. The time reduction gaming state is configured to end. In addition, with this configuration, when the first main game side changes unintentionally when it is desired to end the time reduction game state when the second main game side changes by 1 in the time reduction game state In addition, the time-saving gaming state can be configured not to end, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained. Further, when the second main game side is configured to be able to execute multiple variations in the time-saving game state, the skilled player visually recognizes the second main game symbol display part B21g and confirms the small hit symbol, In the case of a small hit symbol that does not become a time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit game related to the small hit symbol, the game ball launching to the second big prize opening C20 is stopped and the time After the next change in the shortened game state, there is a risk of aiming for winning the small hit symbol that will be in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit game, so the second main game short-time counter MP52c- The initial value of 2 is 1 (this game method is prevented). In addition, the time-reduced gaming state may be terminated when the total number of times of change related to the first main game and the number of times of change related to the second main game reaches a predetermined value.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 7 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1615 (second variation 1) and step 1616 (second variation 1) to step 1628 (second variation 1), and the purpose thereof is during execution of the small hit game. When the player enters the V winning opening C22, the execution start timing of the special game based on the entering is set at the time of entering the “specific entrance”. That is, in step 1615 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start entrance waiting flag is OFF Determine. If Yes in step 1615 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1602, whereas if No, the process proceeds to step 1624 (second modification 1).

  Further, after turning off the specific game flag in step 1604, in step 1616 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 resets (zero clears) the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1. Next, in step 1618 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 resets (zero clears) the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2. Next, in step 1620 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 is an auxiliary game start opening instruction command (a command for instructing the auxiliary game start opening H10 to enter a game ball, for example, (Displayed as a big hit starts when entering the auxiliary game starting port)) is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Next, in step 1622 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 turns on the auxiliary game start port entrance waiting flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and step 1624. Move to (2nd change 1).

  Next, in step 1624 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not a game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1624 (second variation 1), in step 1626 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 enters the auxiliary game start entrance ball in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Turn off the waiting flag. Next, in step 1628 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 indicates that the auxiliary game start port has entered a command (a game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 and that a special game has started. This is a command for notification, for example, “displays a big jackpot” is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 1612 To do. If step 1624 (second variation 1) is No, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1800).

  With this configuration, the execution start timing of the special game can be set at the time of entering the “specific entry gate” (in this example, the auxiliary game start entrance H10), and in particular, the execution of the small hit game When a player enters the V winning slot C22, the execution start timing of the special game based on the received ball can be set at the time of entering the “special entrance” {Of course, via a small hit game The execution start timing of a special game (for example, after the stoppage display of the big hit symbol) can be set at the time of entering the “special entrance”}. In this example, the “specific entry gate” is set as the auxiliary game start opening H10, and the auxiliary game start opening H10 is an entry gate that becomes an opportunity to change the auxiliary game symbol and an entry that becomes an opportunity to start execution of the special game. Although it shares two roles with the mouth, it is not limited to this, and the auxiliary game starting port H10 has only the role of the entrance as a trigger for changing the auxiliary game symbol, A ball entrance that triggers the start of execution may be provided separately. Further, it may be configured such that a game ball that has entered the “specific entrance” enters the variable prize opening that is opened when the special game is executed (in this case, a so-called “specific entry” A variable winning opening is provided downstream of the “mouth”, and when entering the “specific winning opening”, the variable winning opening is immediately opened without providing a so-called jackpot start demonstration time).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 17 in the first modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1766 (second variation 1) to step 1774 (second variation 1), that is, after the end of the special game related to the V prize opening C22 in step 1760 (second). If there is, in step 1766 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the small hit symbol that triggered the entry to the V winning opening C22 is a short time. Is it a small bonus symbol for transition (it is a small bonus symbol that will shift to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game related to the V prize in the small bonus game related to the small bonus game, 7BK in this example) Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1766 (second variation 1), in step 1768 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and enters the V winning opening C22. It is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1768 (second variation 1), in step 1770 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and enters the V winning opening C22. The small bonus symbol that triggered the short-term limited short-time transition small bonus symbol (only if the game is in a time-reduced gaming state at the time of winning the small bonus, it will be related to the V prize in the small bonus game related to the small bonus symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit symbol that will shift to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game, and is 5BK in this example. If Yes in step 1770 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1772 (second modification 1). In the case of Yes in step 1762 (second) or No in step 1766 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1772 (second variation 1).

  Next, in step 1772 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (99 times in this example) in the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1. Next, at step 1774 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (one time in this example) to the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2, and proceeds to step 1756. . The predetermined number of times set in the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1 (99 times in this example) and the predetermined number of times set in the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2 (in this example once) And the sum is 100 times. If the answer is No in step 1768 (second modification 1) or step 1770 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2050 in FIG. 22 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2064 (second variation 1) to step 2074 (second variation 1), and the purpose thereof is to enter the V winning opening C22 particularly during the small hit game. In this case, the player is notified that the game ball is to be launched aiming at the “specific entrance” (in this example, the auxiliary game start port H10). That is, when the special game is not being executed in step 2058, in step 2064 (second variation 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the flag area of the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and waits for the special game start. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2064 (second variation 1), in step 2066 (second variation 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and starts the auxiliary game from the main side. It is determined whether or not an entrance ball instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2066 (second variation 1), in step 2068 (second variation 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 is waiting for a special game start in the flag area of the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b. Turn on the flag. Next, in step 2070 (second variation 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub-sub control unit SS). To the next process (the process of step 2100). In the first modification from the second embodiment, the first right-handed instruction display plays a role of directing the game ball to enter the auxiliary game start port H10 in order to start the special game. Yes. In addition, the said production | generation aspect is not limited to this, It is good also as a 2nd right-handed instruction | indication display, In addition to a right-handed instruction | indication display, it is a special effect (For example, in the effect display device SG "in auxiliary game start opening H10. (In other words, when the player enters the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game, the timing for starting the execution of the special game based on the received ball may be provided. Because it is a special game characteristic that does not exist in the conventional gaming machine when entering the “specific entrance”, it is possible to give clear instructions and notifications to the player as in the dedicated performance. May be preferred). Note that if the answer is No in step 2066 (second variation 1), the routine proceeds to step 2062.

  If the answer is No in step 2064 (second variation 1), in step 2072 (second variation 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and assists from the main side. It is determined whether or not a game start opening instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2072 (second variation 1), in step 2074 (second variation 1), the right-handed instruction display control means SM26 is waiting for a special game start in the flag area of the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b. The flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). In addition, also when it is No at step 2072 (2nd modification 1), it transfers to the next process (process of step 2100).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit or the small hit (whether it is a time-reduced gaming state or a non-time-reduced gaming state) ), The game state (short-time transition rate) after the end of the special game related to the big hit or the small hit can be made different, and the number of times the second main game symbol can be changed in the time-saving game state is one time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of unfair gaming methods such as a gaming method in which a gaming ball is not entered into the V winning opening C22 until winning a small profit symbol with high profits, and the first main game side changes unintentionally. Even if it has been done, the time-saving gaming state can be configured not to end, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained.

  Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, after the big hit (the big hit symbol is stopped or the conditional device operation flag is turned on when the player enters the V winning opening C22), a special By configuring a special game to start by entering a game ball into a ball entrance (in this example, the auxiliary game start port H10) that becomes a transition opportunity to the game, The game ball can be stopped at the timing when the condition device operation flag is turned on even during a period in which a state of high profits continues for the player, reducing fatigue caused by continuing the game for a long time. (For example, a game can be interrupted and a toilet break can be taken), and a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained.

(Third embodiment)
In the embodiments shown so far, when the state is shifted to the time-reduced gaming state, the second main game side can be held until the second main game side hold upper limit is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the expected number related to the number of reserves on the second main game side that can occur even when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state changes, In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to construct a new gameability that cannot be achieved in the embodiments shown so far. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the third embodiment is also a modification based on this embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in this embodiment can be applied in the third embodiment. In the following exemplification in the third embodiment, in order to realize the special gameability, it is assumed that the variable fixed time related to the main game symbol is uniform (for example, 0.2 seconds) in a short time. }.

  In the third embodiment, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the main game symbol at the limited frequency, and the variation mode related to the main game symbol at the limited frequency are determined. A table MN52ta for determining a limited frequency variation mode comprising a plurality of tables that are configured to be referred to depending on the gaming state, the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game, and the like. And limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information related to the limited frequency (such as flag on / off).

  First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1201 (third) and step 1247-1 (third) to step 1247-4 (third), that is, auxiliary game symbol control in step 1201 (third). The means MP11-H refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and determines whether or not the electric accessory waiting flag is off. If Yes in step 1201 (third), the process proceeds to step 1202, whereas if No, the process proceeds to step 1247-3 (third).

  Next, after closing the electric accessory in Step 1244, in Step 1247-1 (third), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the waiting time timer MP11t-H2 for a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds). ) Is set and started. Next, in step 1247-2 (third), the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns on the electric accessory waiting flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, The process shifts to 1247-3 (third).

  Next, in step 1247-3 (third), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the standby time timer MP11t-H2, and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1247-3 (third), in step 1247-4 (third), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. The bonus waiting flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1246. In the case of No in step 1247-3 (third), the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1300). In this way, the variation time determined in the time-saving gaming state is configured such that it can be opened and closed again after the standby time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is closed. The number of times that the second main game hold can be generated can be stabilized, the effect relating to the occurrence of the hold, and the number of times the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is released in the time-saving game state. It is possible to secure time for executing such effects, effects relating to whether or not the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened, etc. in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, the effect similar to the standby time may be realized by setting the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol in the time-saving game state to a long time (for example, 5 seconds). However, if the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is set to a long time (for example, 5 seconds), the variation related to the auxiliary game symbol that started to change during the special game (especially, the variation in the non-time-reduced game state) When straddling the game end timing, variation occurs in the timing at which the variation related to the next auxiliary game symbol of the variation starts, thereby varying the number of second main game suspensions that can occur during the time-reduced gaming state. It tends to occur. Therefore, for example, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is set to be as short as possible, and the special game end timing and the variation display start timing of the auxiliary game symbol are combined, and the standby time (the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is It is effective to use a fixed period that does not occur unless it is released, and to stabilize the number that can cause the second main game suspension within the variation time determined in the time-reduced gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 7 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1402 (third), the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A to determine whether or not there is a hold of the first main game symbol. Check. In the case of Yes in step 1402 (third), in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600). . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1402 (third), in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Transition. In this way, in the third embodiment, the first main game hold is digested in preference to the second main game hold (however, the present invention is not limited to this, but the first main game hold). The second main game suspension may be preferentially digested).

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 49 in the third embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 1449 (third), step 1550 and step 1449-1 (third) to step 1449-12 (third), that is, in step 1410, the main game symbol is stopped. After determining the symbol, in step 1449 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and the limited frequency flag (limited frequency A flag, limited frequency B). It is determined whether any one of the flag and the limited frequency C flag) is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1449 (third), in step 1550 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1450.

  Further, after the condition device operation flag is turned on in step 1446, in step 1449-1 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 determines the limited frequency within the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. Turn on the B flag. Next, in step 1449-2 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines that the medium profit granting command (the variation time related to the second main game symbol after the big hit or small hit to be executed is the time for the player) A command for notifying that the profit rate is medium) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (by the control command transmission process in step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side). Is transmitted), and the flow proceeds to Step 1449-11 (third).

  On the other hand, after the small hit flag is turned on in step 1448, in step 1449-3 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. In addition, the stop symbol is a high profit granting small hit symbol (a small hit symbol in which the variation time related to the second main game symbol after the small hit game ends becomes a high profit rate for the player, in this example, 7BK) It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1449-3 (third), in step 1449-4 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 determines the limited frequency C flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. Turn on. Next, in step 1449-5 (third), the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52 determines that the high profit granting command (the fluctuation time related to the second main game symbol after the big hit or small hit to be executed has been changed for the player). A command for notifying that the profit rate is high) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to step 1449-11 (third).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1449-3 (third), in step 1449-6 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The stop symbol is a medium profit granting small hit symbol (a small hit symbol in which the fluctuation time related to the second main game symbol after the small hit game ends becomes a medium profit rate for the player. 4BK). In the case of Yes in step 1449-6 (third), in step 1449-7 (third), the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 determines the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on. Next, in step 1449-8 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines that the medium profit granting command (the variation time related to the second main game symbol after the big hit or small hit to be executed is the time for the player). A command for notifying that the profit rate is medium) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (by the control command transmission process in step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side). Is transmitted), and the flow proceeds to Step 1449-11 (third).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1449-6 (third), in step 1449-9 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 determines the limited frequency within the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. Turn on the A flag. Next, in step 1449-10 (third), the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52 determines that the low profit granting command (the fluctuation time related to the second main game symbol after the big hit or the small hit to be executed has been changed for the player). A command for notifying that the profit rate is low) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to step 1449-11 (third).

  Next, in step 1449-11 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets an initial value (10 times in this example) to the first main game limited frequency counter MN52c-1. Next, in step 1449-12 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets an initial value (in this example, once) to the second main game limited frequency counter MN52c-2, and in step 1500 Transition.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 (third) in FIG. 50 in the third embodiment. First, at step 1552, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b to determine whether or not the limited frequency A flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A (limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta) and determines the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol. Then, the process proceeds to step 1562. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, in step 1556, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and determines whether or not the limited frequency B flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1556, in step 1558, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table B (limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta) and determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. Then, the process proceeds to step 1562. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1556, in other words, if the limited frequency C flag is on, in step 1560, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 displays the limited frequency table C (limited frequency variation mode determining table MN52ta). With reference to this, a variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1562.

  Next, in step 1562, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and determines whether or not the variation is a variation related to the first main game. In the case of Yes in Step 1562, in Step 1564, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements the counter value of the first main game limited frequency counter MN52c-1 by 1. Next, at step 1566, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the first main game limited frequency counter MN52c-1, and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1566, in step 1570, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 determines the limited frequency flag (limited frequency A flag, limited frequency B flag, limited frequency) in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. (C flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1562, in step 1568, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements the counter value of the second main game limited frequency counter MN52c-2 by 1 and proceeds to step 1570 (second main game). Since the initial value set in the limited frequency counter MN52c-2 is 1, the counter value after subtraction is not referred to. In the case of No in step 1566, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1450).

  Next, FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the third embodiment. The content of this table is a configuration in which a plurality of jackpot symbols are provided in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. In addition, regarding the table surrounded by the dotted line of the main game table 3, in the non-time-reduced game state, it is difficult to change the second main game, and in the time-reduced game state, the first main game side, Since the limited frequency table is referred to on both the two main game sides, it is not substantially referred to.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram in the third embodiment. The figure includes a limited frequency table A, a limited frequency table B, and a limited frequency table C. In all the tables, the variation mode is uniquely determined, and the difference for each limited frequency table is the content on the second main game side. The variation time related to the second main game side is “when referring to the limited frequency table C> when referring to the limited frequency table B> when referring to the limited frequency table A”, and in the time shortening gaming state in which only one variation is made. The expected value at which the second main game hold can be caused by the variation on the second main game side is different. In the third embodiment, the fluctuation related to the second main game hold is won almost at the small hit, and the special game related to the V prize is executed with the small hit as an opportunity. Are directly linked to the player's interests. Accordingly, the profit rate of the player is also “when referring to the limited frequency table C> when referring to the limited frequency table B> when referring to the limited frequency table A”. In addition, since the waiting time (5 seconds) which concerns on 2nd main game start opening electric accessory B11d is provided, the number which can raise | generate the 2nd main game hold | maintenance mentioned above is provided at the time of referencing limited frequency table A Is approximately 1 to 2 when referring to the limited frequency table B, and approximately 4 to 5 when referring to the limited frequency table C.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1776 (third) and step 1777 (third), that is, in step 1776 (third), the specific game control means MP50 is the first main game short time counter MP52c. -1 is set a predetermined number of times (10 times). Next, in step 1777 (third), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number (one time) in the second main game short time counter MP52c-2, and proceeds to step 1756. As described above, in the third embodiment, like the first modification from the second embodiment, either the first main game short-time counter MP52c-1 or the second main game short-time counter MP52c-2 is used. When the value becomes 0, the time saving gaming state is configured to end. The number of time reductions and the limited frequency are the same.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of Step 2100 of FIG. 22 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2120 (third) and step 2122 (third). That is, after temporarily storing the hold information in step 2106, in step 2120 (third), the drawing hold information is stored. The display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the second main game side. If step 2120 (third) is Yes, in step 2122 (third), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for executing the second main game hold occurrence effect (display command transmission control in step 2700). In the processing, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to Step 2118. Here, the lower right part of the figure is an image diagram of the second main game suspension occurrence. As described above, since the generated second main game suspension number is directly linked to the player's profit, an effect of notifying that a highly profitable event has occurred is executed.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 22 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2500 (third), that is, after the big hit start display is executed in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 is described later in step 2500 (third). Then, the special game effect display control process is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game effect display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2500 (third) of FIG. 45 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a high profit granting command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 notifies that the player will be highly profitable after the special game is finished (for example, “execute battle effect → win with special move”). Is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 2506. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2506.

  Next, at step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a medium profit granting command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 gives an effect (for example, “execute battle effect → win with punch”) notifying that it will be a medium profit for the player after the special game ends. The command to be executed is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 2510. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2506, the process proceeds to step 2510.

  Next, in step 2510, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a low profit granting command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in Step 2510, in Step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 executes an effect (for example, “Battle Effect Execution → Defeat”) that notifies the player that the profit will be low after the special game ends. The command is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2700), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2420). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2510, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2420).

  With the configuration as described above, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment is configured to refer to the limited frequency table after the end of the special game, and the big hit symbol or the small hit that stops immediately before the execution of the special game. The limited frequency table to be referred to is determined based on the symbol. In addition, the change related to the second main game hold is won almost at the small hit, and the special game is won by entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game (the change related to the second main game hold is special) And the number of possible fluctuations relating to the second main game in the time-reduced gaming state is only one variation, so that the variation time of only the one variation is configured. However, the number of occurrences of the second hold can be determined, and the player pays attention to one change after the special game ends.

  In addition, in 3rd Embodiment, although it comprised so that the limited frequency table (or the variation time which concerns on a 2nd main game symbol) referred after the said special game by the effect in special game might be suggested, The present invention is not limited to this example, and it may be configured not to notify the profit mode definitely in the effect during the special game, but to notify the result of the profit mode in the effect related to the change after the end of the special game. In addition, it may be configured to execute both the effect during the special game and the effect after the special game (for example, “Battle effect → defeat” during the special game, "etc).

  In addition, the basic idea for realizing the playability of the third embodiment is a period in which the time-saving game state (that is, the state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easily opened) is maintained. The expectation value relating to the total number of balls entering the second main game start opening B10 is varied. Therefore, the gameability that can be realized based on such an idea is not limited to the above-described example in the third embodiment, but can be various gameplay concepts. A method of changing the expected value related to the total period length during which the gaming state is maintained, and the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in an open state (second main game starting) during the period in which the time-saving gaming state is maintained. And a method of changing the expected value related to the total length of the period for maintaining the opening to the extent that it is possible to enter the mouth B10). Therefore, although more specific methods for each method are listed, it is supplemented that any combination of these listed methods is possible.

<Method of changing the expected value related to the total period length during which the time-saving gaming state is maintained>
-A technique for varying the variation time of the main game symbol as illustrated above in the third embodiment-A method for varying the variation fixed time after the variation display of the main game symbol as illustrated in this embodiment-Small The opening interval period of the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d during the execution of the winning game {the so-called start demonstration period (waiting period until the first opening is performed) or the end demonstration period (after the final opening, the small hit (Waiting period until the game is ended), a method of changing the closing period when performing a series of operations of opening → closing → opening}, a method of changing the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol (however, in this case, (It is better to increase the probability that the result of the decision on the main game symbol will be lost)

<A method of varying the expected value related to the total length of time during which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is kept open during the period in which the time-reduced gaming state is maintained>
-A method of changing the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol, or a method of varying the variable fixed time after displaying the variation of the auxiliary game symbol-Winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol (selection probability of the winning symbol "D1" in this embodiment) The method of changing the opening mode (opening time) of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d (in this case, by changing the opening time of one time to the second main game start opening B10) Will change the expected number of incoming balls)

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, by configuring the limited frequency table to be referenced based on the small hit symbol, the expected number that can cause the second main game hold can be changed in the so-called electric support state. Although configured as described above, the gameability can be realized without using a limited frequency table. Thus, an example of such a configuration is a first modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the first modification from the third embodiment is also a modification based on the third embodiment, any configuration shown in the third embodiment is a first modification from the third embodiment. Note that it is applicable.

  First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of Step 1200 in FIG. 7 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 1247-1 (third variation 1), that is, after closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d in step 1244, step 1247-1 (first change). In the third variation 1), the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B sets a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) in the waiting time timer MP11t-H2, starts the timer, The process shifts to 1247-2 (third). As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the waiting time from the closing of the second main game start-up electric accessory B11d to the start of the new auxiliary game symbol variation is 1 second. Thus, when the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state) is entered, the symbol variation of the auxiliary gaming symbol is shortened as much as possible (in this example, 0.01 seconds), and the second main game starts. The waiting time from the closing of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d to the start of the symbol change of the new auxiliary game symbol is stabilized while opening the oral electric accessory B11d immediately ( As a result, the time interval from when a second main game hold is generated until the next second main game hold can be generated is stabilized).

  Next, FIG. 59 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the first modification from the third embodiment. In the first modification from the third embodiment, in the main game table 3, the variation time determined in the time reduction game state on the second main game side and the table at the time of hit (at the time of big hit, small hit) It is configured to be determined depending on the number of subsequent second main game holds. In addition, when “B0 (0.5 seconds)” is selected as the variation mode of the second main game symbol in consideration of the control processing of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d described above, During the symbol change, it becomes difficult to generate the second main game hold. When “B2 (15 seconds)” is selected, the second main game hold is generated up to the upper limit number (4) during the symbol change. It is configured to be easy (the second main game start port when the waiting time of the second main game start port B11d is 1 second and one game ball enters the second main game start port B10) (Because the opening of the electric accessory B11d ends). In the first modification from the third embodiment, the variation time determined in the time reduction gaming state on the second main game side and the table at the time of hit (at the time of big hit, small hit) is It is configured to be determined depending on the number of the two main game holds, and “B2 (15 seconds)” is selected in about 1/10 of the case where the number of the second main game hold is 0, and the second main game It is configured so that “B2 (15 seconds)” is selected every time when the number of holdings is 1 to 3, but the changing time selected when the number of second main game holdings is 1 to 3 (Or a selection candidate of the change time) is not limited to this, and a long time that can be selected when the number of second main game suspensions is 0, such as a change time of 10 seconds every change (this example) Then, a variation time different from the variation time of 15 seconds) may be selected when the number of second main game suspensions is 1 to 3. .

  Further, the table surrounded by the dotted line of the main game table 3, that is, the non-time-saving game state and the table related to the second main game is difficult to be executed as in the third embodiment. Further, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the limited frequency configuration (limited frequency table, etc.) is deleted (although it is an essential configuration in the third embodiment, the change from the third embodiment) In Example 1, it is not an essential configuration).

  Note that in the first modification from the third embodiment, the variation time determined in the time-saving gaming state on the second main game side and the table at the time of winning (at the time of big hit, small hit) is the second after the suspended digestion. It is configured to be determined depending on the number of the two main game holds, but is not limited to this, and the variation time determined in the table is determined depending on the number of the second main game reservations before the reservation is finished. In such a case, in the rush zone, which will be described later, the fluctuation time when there is one pre-digestion hold to be digested can be reliably set to 15 seconds, It can be set as the structure which does not impair the game property of this example. In other words, if it is configured to determine the variation time depending on the number of holdings before holding up, the game is executed when there is one holding and when the change ends and the holding is used up. In order to provide a characteristic that the table for determining the variation time to be referenced can be made different from the case where one ball enters the main game start opening, this characteristic is used in the first modification from the third embodiment. Can be used.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 17 in the first modification from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are Step 1777-1 (Third Modification 1) and Step 1777-2 (Third Modification 1), that is, in Step 1777-1 (Third Modification 1), a specific game The control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the stop symbol is the first main game big hit symbol (in this example, only 7A). If Yes in step 1777-1 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1776 (third), and if No, in step 1777-2 (third variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 Referring to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, it is determined whether the finished special game is a special game triggered by the second main game short transition small hit symbol (7BK). If Yes in step 1777-2 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1776 (third), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1800). In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the end condition of the time-reduced game state is that the first main game symbol has ended fluctuating 10 times, or the second main game symbol has ended fluctuating once. However, the condition for ending the time-saving game state is not limited to this. For example, the total number of times the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are changed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). It is good. In addition, the time shortening game state end condition may be combined, for example, the total number of change end times of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined number A (for example, 10 times), the first Either the variation end number of 1 main game symbol reaches a predetermined number B (for example, 8 times) or the variation end number of second main game symbol reaches a predetermined number of times C (for example, 5 times) In such a case, the time saving gaming state may be configured to end.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a game progress flowchart in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the game flow shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail.

<Game progress flow 1>
When the player is in the “normal game” (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which the second main game start port B11d is not in an open state, so-called non-electric support state), the player starts the first main game. A game ball is launched by aiming at the mouth A10 (so-called left-handed) to advance the game. Then, when winning a big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, a big hit probability = 1/234), which is triggered by entering the first main game start opening A10, as shown in the figure. After winning the first main game big win, and after the symbol variation of the first main game based on the win is finished (after the big win symbol of the first main game is stopped and displayed), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for two rounds is executed (in this example, the first grand prize opening C10 is opened and “15 prize balls” × “9 counts” = “135 balls” is obtained per round. it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> is completed, the “rush challenge zone” shown in the figure (the game state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is likely to be opened, Since the player shifts to the so-called electric support state = short-time state, the player launches a game ball (so-called right-handed) to advance the game by aiming at the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. , It is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 (the winning main lottery on the second main game side and the second main game design triggered by entering the second main game start opening B10) Fluctuations are made). However, under this situation, no hold on the second main game side (second main game hold) has occurred.

<Game progress flow 3>
After that, the player enters the “rush challenge zone”, and the player launches the game ball aiming at the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d (so-called right-handed), and advances the game. Small wins due to fluctuations in the second main game symbol related to the ball entering the game start opening B10 (the winning lottery relating to the second main game is won by 1 / 1.01, so it is almost a small win win) When winning, after the symbol variation of the second main game symbol based on the winning is finished (after the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), a small hit game for one round is executed. (In this example, the second grand prize opening C20 is opened, but when configured as in this embodiment, if the game ball is continuously launched aiming at the second big prize opening C20, It is almost definitive to enter the V winning opening C22). Here, the fluctuation time related to the small hit symbol will depend on the number of holdings after holding up as in the “second main game changing time” in the lower left part of the figure, And, since the second main game hold is not generated during the big hit that occurred on the first main game side, when the variation time of the second main game symbol in the “rush challenge zone” is determined, the “number of hold 0” The variation time is determined at the distribution rate of “1” (0.5 seconds is 90%, 15 seconds is 10%). Here, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when the variation time is 0.5 seconds, the second main game hold can hardly occur during the variation of 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, if the variation time is 15 seconds, the second main game hold is configured to occur up to the upper limit number (4 in this example) during the variation of 15 seconds. When the second main game suspension occurs, the game proceeds to the “rush zone” shown in the figure.

<Game progress flow 4>
In the “Rush Challenge Zone” shown in the figure, when the second main game hold cannot be generated, after the small hit game ends, the “second main game small hit → big hit in the figure” As shown in the figure, the big hit (from the small hit game to the small hit game is triggered by the predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, two rounds)) (In this example, in the special game triggered by the small hit, the first big winning opening C10 is opened and “15 prize balls” × “9” per round. "Count" = "135 balls" can be obtained, and when the predetermined maximum number of rounds is two rounds, approximately 250 balls including the game balls obtained by the small hit game remain as the player's balls).

<Game progress flow 5>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 4> is completed, the selection rate of 50% (for example, the second main game small hit symbol “that will shift to the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game” 1AK ”and a second main game small hit symbol“ 2AK ”that will shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game, and is selected at 1AK: 2AK = 1: 1) Based on the small hit symbol related to the game, the gaming state after the end of the special game is determined. When the game state is a time-reduced game state, the same action as in <Game progress flow 3> is performed again, that is, the process proceeds to the “rush challenge zone”. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time-reduced gaming state, the non-time-reducing gaming state and the number of second main game suspensions are 0, so that the process proceeds to the “normal game” shown in the figure. It will be.

<Game progress flow 6>
In addition, when the game moves to the “rush zone” in the above <Game progress flow 3>, after the end of the small hit game, as in the above <Game progress flow 4>, a predetermined maximum number of rounds In the example, two rounds of special game will be executed, but since the second main game hold exists, after the special game ends, the second main game hold is digested and the second main game hold is completed. The game symbols are changed, and a special game for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, 2 rounds) is executed again (due to entering the V winning opening C22). In this way, until the number of second main game holds becomes zero, special games for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, two rounds) continue (due to entering the V winning opening C22). Will be executed. In addition, the variation time related to the second main game small winning symbol is always 15 seconds when the second main game hold is present as in the “second main game symbol variation time” in the lower left part of the figure. Therefore, if the transition to the time-reduced gaming state can be made after the end of the special game on the second main game side, the upper limit number of second main game holds (four in this example) during the fluctuating time of 15 seconds. (On the other hand, when a transition is made to the non-time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game on the second main game side, the second main game hold is generated during the fifteen-second fluctuation period) Can't). Therefore, in the “rush zone”, after the special game is finished, the non-time-reduced gaming state is entered, and before the second main game holding becomes zero, the state is shifted to the time-reduced gaming state state after any special game is finished. If it can be made, it is possible to create a game characteristic that a total of five special games, ie, one of the fluctuations and the second main game suspension (four upper limit numbers) are almost committed. In the “rush zone”, after the special game is over, if the non-time-reduced game state is reached and the number of second main game holds is zero, the process proceeds to “normal game” in the figure.

  In addition, as described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the configuration of the table for determining the variation time of the second main game symbol in the time-saving game state is referred to the number of reservations before the reservation is completed. The variable time may be determined, and the variable time related to the last hold in the “rush zone” (hold when the second main game hold number becomes 1) is also long. It can be time (fluctuation time of 15 seconds).

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment, the table to be referred to when determining the variation time of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, The number of second main game holds is set to the upper limit (in this example, in this example) when a long time (15 seconds in this example) is selected. 4)), that is, it can be entered into the Renso Zone ("Rush Zone"), and all the pending holds are digested, and after the special game related to the final hold is over If the time-saving game state is not entered, the extended zone (“rush zone”) will end. By configuring in this way, the entry condition of the extended zone (“rush zone”) is that a long fluctuation time is selected, while the continuous condition of the extended zone (“rush zone”) is It is possible to create a novel gameability that is different from the entry condition and the continuation condition that there is a hold.

(Fourth embodiment)
Here, in this embodiment, when all the second main game hold in the non-time-reduced game state is digested and the winning is not won, the game is returned to the left hand and advantageous to the player. Although the state is configured to end (return to the normal game), it may be configured to be able to be in an advantageous state for the player again after returning to the left. An example of such a configuration is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the fourth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied in the fourth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 62 is a front view of a gaming machine in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that a second-type non-electrical accessory B12 is provided. The second type non-electrically-powered object B12 enters an open state when a game ball enters the second main game start opening B10, and two game balls enter the second-type non-electrically-charged object B12 from the opening timing. By this, it is comprised so that it may be in a closed state. In addition, when one game ball enters the second type non-electrical accessory B12, one second main game hold is generated.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 10 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that the maximum number of second main game holds is two, and when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10, When the game ball is opened and two game balls enter after the timing, the second type non-electrically-powered object is closed. The second type non-electrical accessory is an accessory that is not an electric accessory (an accessory that is not electrically driven and controlled), and opens or enlarges the entrance of a prize opening other than the big prize opening. , Which is activated when a game ball wins a specific winning opening other than the winning opening or passes a specific gate.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that two jackpot symbols related to the first main game are provided, and the jackpot symbol (7A in this example) that shifts to the time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot related to the first main game ends. And a jackpot symbol (4A in this example) that shifts to the non-time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot relating to the first main game is completed.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is Step 1778 (fourth) to Step 1780 (fourth), that is, if the special game related to the first main game side is currently ended in Step 1752, Step 1778 is executed. In (4), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stopped big hit symbol is a short-time transition big hit symbol (time-saving game state after the big hit ends) It is determined whether or not it is a big hit symbol that shifts to (7A) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1778 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1755 (becomes time-saving gaming state).

  On the other hand, if it is not after the end of the special game related to the first main game side in step 1752, in step 1779 (fourth), the specific game control means MP50 first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b- Referring to C, after the end of the special game related to the second main game symbol (only the special game related to the second main game jackpot symbol, the entry to the V prize opening triggered by the stop of the second main game small hit symbol Whether or not a special game related to a ball is included). In the case of Yes in step 1779 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1755 (becomes time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1779 (fourth), in other words, if it is after the end of the special game related to the V prize opening C22, in step 1780 (fourth), the specific game control means MP50 Referring to the two-main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game related to the small win won in the time-saving game state. In the case of Yes in step 1780 (fourth), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800) (becomes a non-time-reduced gaming state), whereas in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1755 (time-reduced game). State).

  In the case of No in step 1778 (fourth), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800) (becomes a non-time-saving gaming state).

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, even if the second main game hold in the non-time-reduced gaming state is completely digested and the winning point cannot be won, In the game returned to, the second main game hold can be caused by putting the game ball into the second type non-electrical accessory, and the game is played again by winning the small hit related to the second main game. It is possible to create a novel gameability of bringing back an advantageous state that can be brought into an advantageous state for a person.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the fourth embodiment, the second type non-electrically-powered object is provided in order to bring back an advantageous state for the player, but the configuration using the second type non-electrically-powered object is not limited to this. . An example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the fourth embodiment, and only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the first modification from the fourth embodiment is also a modification based on the fourth embodiment, any configuration shown in the fourth embodiment is a first modification from the fourth embodiment. Note that it is applicable.

  In the first modified example from the fourth embodiment, the second type non-electrical accessory B12 of the fourth embodiment is the left second type non-electrical accessory B12, and the added second type non-electrical accessory is the second right It is referred to as a seed non-electric accessory B13. In addition, the second main game start port B10 of the fourth embodiment is not a main game start port, and is a ball entrance for opening the left second type non-electric accessory B12 and the right second type non-electric accessory B13. Therefore, it is set as a non-electric-powered accessory opening entrance B15.

  First, FIG. 66 is a front view of a gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. The difference from the fourth embodiment is that the second type non-electrical accessory B12 is arranged on the right side of the board, and the second main game start opening B10 of the fourth embodiment is a non-electrical accessory opening entrance B15. It is that.

  By configuring as described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the second main game suspension and the non-electrically-powered object are generated by the game ball entering the second main game start port B10. Although both are configured to be executed, by placing the second type non-electrical accessory B12 on the right side of the board surface, the game ball can enter the non-electrical accessory opening entrance B15. The second type non-electrically-powered object is released, and the game ball entering the second-type non-electrically-charged object causes the second main game hold to occur, and the second main game start opening B10 Unlike the fourth embodiment, in which the second type non-electrical accessory B12 is opened and the second main game suspension is caused due to entering the ball, one entrance has one action. (2nd main game suspension occurs when entering the right second type non-electrical accessory B13, etc.) Can, so that the fairness of the game is collateral.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the embodiments shown so far, various games are realized by configuring the special game to be executed when the player enters the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game. Even if it is not provided (that is, using only the characteristics of the small hit game), it is possible to create a new game. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the fifth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied in the fifth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 67 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the sorting role control process and the V winning opening entry determination process are deleted, and the number of winning balls in the second big winning opening C20 is 15 balls. In the fifth embodiment, since the game performance is such that the game balls are acquired by continuing the small hit game, the award of the second big winning port C20, which is a big winning port related to the small hit game, is obtained. The number of balls is greater than that of the present embodiment (details will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 7 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1650 (fifth), that is, after shifting the hold information in step 1406, in step 1650 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50, which will be described later, falls. Execution processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1408.

  Next, FIG. 69 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the game state related to the main game has a so-called probability variation game state (a function that increases the winning probability of the main game symbol). Further, in the fifth embodiment, the V prize opening C22 is not provided, and the small win itself is not a trigger for the transition to the special game.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 1650 (fifth) in FIG. 69 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1652, in Step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/32). ). Next, in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the lottery result and determines whether or not the lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1656, in step 1658, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next process (process in step 1408). Migrate to In addition, also when it is No in step 1652 or step 1656, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1408).

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 7 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1604-1 (fifth), that is, if the condition device operation flag is ON in step 1602, special game control is performed in step 1604-1 (fifth). The means MP30 turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short flag) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to Step 1610.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 in FIG. 17 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1752-1 (fifth), step 1752-2 (fifth), and step 1755-1 (fifth) to step 1755-3 (fifth). In 1752-1 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the special game related to the second main game side has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1752-1 (fifth), in step 1752-2 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the stop symbol relating to the finished special game Determines whether it is a long / short special game symbol (7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1752-2 (fifth), in step 1755-1 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 has a predetermined number of times A (a relatively high number of times in the time-count counter MP52c, in this example, , 100 times), and proceeds to Step 1755-2 (fifth).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752-1 (fifth) or step 1752-2 (fifth), in step 1755-3 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 counts the predetermined number of times B ( The number of times is relatively small. In this example, 1 is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 1755-2 (fifth). Next, in step 1755-2 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1756.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a game progress flowchart in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the game flow shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail.

<Game progress flow 1>
When the player is in the “normal game” (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which the second main game start port B11d is not in an open state, so-called non-electric support state), the player starts the first main game. A game ball is launched by aiming at the mouth A10 (so-called left-handed) to advance the game. Then, when winning a big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, a big hit probability = 1/256), which is triggered by entering the first main game start opening A10, as shown in the figure. After winning the first main game big win, and after the symbol variation of the first main game based on the win is finished (after the big win symbol of the first main game is stopped and displayed), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, 10 rounds of special games are executed (in this example, the first grand prize opening C10 is opened and “15 prize balls” × “9 counts” = “135 balls” is obtained per round. it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> is completed, the “alpha rush” (probability variation game state shown in the figure and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened. Since it is an easy game state and shifts to a so-called electric support state = short-time state), the player launches a game ball (so-called right-handed) aiming at the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. By proceeding with the game, it is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 (the winning lottery and the second main game side at the second main game start side are triggered by the entrance into the second main game start opening B10) 2 The main game symbols are changed).

<Game progress flow 3>
Thereafter, the player enters the “alpha rush”, and the player advances the game by launching a game ball (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d, and the second main game. Winning a small hit by the variation of the 2nd main game symbol related to the entrance to the starting port B10 (in the winning lottery related to the 2nd main game, winning at 1 / 1.01 is almost winning the small hit) Then, after the symbol variation of the second main game symbol based on the winning is finished (after the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), one round of small hit game is executed ( In this example, the second big prize opening C20 is opened, but unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, in the fifth embodiment, since the V prize opening C22 is not provided, the small winning prize is triggered. Will not win the big hits, but will win in the small hit game itself Rukoto has become possible). Further, since the time-reduced gaming state ends with a single change of the main game symbol (transitions to the non-time-reduced gaming state), the time-reduced gaming state transitions to the non-time-reduced gaming state at the end of the variation relating to the small hit. Note that the probability variation gaming state does not end depending on the number of variations of the main game symbol. In addition, during the fluctuation related to the small hit, the second main game hold can occur up to the upper limit number (4 in this example), and even after the gaming state becomes a non-time-reduced gaming state, In order to win almost a small hit with the change related to the hold, a total of 5 wins will be won during the “Alpha Rush”. In the small hit, the second big prize opening C20 can be awarded nine counts (the second big prize opening C20 is the same as in the present embodiment, and during the small hit game execution time) It is configured such that nine balls can be won in the second major winning opening C20), and approximately 140 winning balls can be obtained in one small hit. Here, as shown in “Timing chart related to game progress” in the lower left part of the figure, when the change of the second main game symbol in “Alpha Rush” is related to the small hit, the change end timing Because the time-saving game ends at, the game is in a non-time-saving game state during the small hit execution. Because it is configured in this way, the game balls that are earned at the small hits in “Alpha Rush” are not the number of prize balls that are paid out in the time-reduced game state. It is possible to prevent the number from becoming too large, and it is a fair game machine.

<Game progress flow 4>
After the end of “Alpha Rush”, the game moves to “Falling lottery with probability variation 1/32” shown in the figure, and the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state. The game is advanced by firing a game ball (so-called left-handed) aiming at the first main game start opening A10. In the fifth embodiment, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, a random lottery end lottery (a lottery for shifting to the non-probability variation gaming state, so-called falling lottery) is executed at the start of each variation variation. If the first main game wins a big win before winning the falling lottery, the game moves to the “first main game big win” shown in the figure, while the first main game side If the winning lottery is won before winning the jackpot, the game shifts to “normal game” shown in the figure. In addition, the fall lottery is executed even in the fluctuation during “Alpha Rush”, so if you win the fall lottery during “Alpha Rush”, after “Alpha Rush” ends, “Normal” It will shift to "Game".

<Game progress flow 5>
It should be noted that in the “alpha rush”, the second main game in which the maximum round (15R in this example) is executed in the variation on the second main game side (maximum five variations including the variation related to the second main game hold). When winning the game jackpot symbol (in this example, the ratio of selection of the second main game jackpot symbol for executing the 10R special game: the second main game jackpot symbol for executing the 15R special game is selected) (The ratio is 99: 1), it will shift to the “super alpha rush” shown in the figure, and after the big hit of 15R, the number of time reductions will be given 100 times, and the time-reduced gaming state Will be won in the small hits with the remaining change on the second main game side after the end of the fluctuation for the short time, and a maximum of 104 small hits will be won, that is, “104 times” × “140 balls” = “14 So that the 60-ball "of winning balls can be obtained. In addition, when a big hit is won in “Super Alpha Rush”, “Super Alpha Rush” is ended, and “Alpha Rush” is entered. By being configured in this way, in “Super Alpha Rush”, instead of winning the falling lottery and being in the probability varying gaming state, winning the falling lottery and playing the normal gaming state (non-probability varying gaming state and It is advantageous for the player to shift to the (non-time-reduced gaming state) and have a lower probability of jackpot. In addition, when 100 fluctuations, which is the number of time reductions in the “super alpha rush”, are finished, the “normal game” shown in FIG.

  By configuring as described above, in the fifth embodiment, the V winning opening C22 is not provided, and the structure of the second large winning opening C20 similar to the present embodiment (the second large winning opening C20 when the small hit game is executed). Game balls of the maximum count number can enter), and the second main game side wins almost every change, and the second main game hold upper limit number is plural (in this example, 4) Therefore, it is possible to acquire a predetermined number of game balls by winning one small hit, and to create a novel gameability such as acquiring game balls in consecutive small hits. .

  In the fifth embodiment, it is not necessary to provide a probability variation gaming state as a gaming state related to the main game. Like the present embodiment, the gaming state related to the main game is a normal gaming state (non-time shortened gaming state). ) And time-saving gaming state only.

  In the fifth embodiment, the probability variation gaming state is ended by winning the falling lottery. However, the configuration is changed to the probability variation gaming state, and a predetermined number of variations (for example, 10 variations) is performed. May be configured not to win the falling lottery (the probability variation gaming state will not end), and may be configured to execute the falling lottery at every variation after the predetermined number of fluctuations have elapsed (in such a case) Should be configured not to fall during "Alpha Rush"). Also, in the fifth embodiment, the effect executed during the “alpha rush” is the same effect mode as the effect during the special game that has been transferred to the “alpha rush”. You may comprise so that an "alpha rush" may be performed continuously, and it may be one special game.

(Sixth embodiment)
In addition to the configuration of the embodiment shown so far, it is possible to create a new game with the configuration having the small hit and the V winning opening C22. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the sixth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied in the sixth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 74 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that two auxiliary game start ports are provided. That is, the auxiliary game starting port that is easy to enter when left-handed and difficult (or impossible) to enter when right-handed is the first auxiliary game starting port H10-1, and when left-handed, The auxiliary game start port H10-2 that is difficult (or impossible) to enter the ball and easily enters the ball when hit right is the second auxiliary game start port H10-2. The first auxiliary game start port H10-1 is provided with a first auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s-1 for detecting a ball entering the start port. The mouth H10-2 is provided with a second auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s-2 for detecting entrance into the start entrance. In the sixth embodiment, the second main game start port B10 is provided at a position where it is difficult (or impossible) to enter when left-handed and easy to enter when right-handed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be provided at a position where the player can enter the ball either left-handed or right-handed (for example, below the first main game start opening A10). With such a configuration, even when the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened due to the left-hand hit and the game ball entering the first auxiliary game start port H10-1, the left By continuing the hitting, the game ball can enter the second main game start port B10. Further, only one auxiliary game start port may be provided, and in such a configuration, the position of the auxiliary game start port is determined when left-handed and when right-handed. In any of the above, if it is configured to be provided at a position where a game ball can enter the auxiliary game start port, or if left-handed is executed, all winning ports related to the progress of the game (the first main game) A structure that can enter the game starting port, the second main game starting port, the first grand prize winning port, the second grand winning port, the auxiliary gaming starting port, etc. It is desirable to configure the game board surface so that the game can proceed. It should be noted that there is no problem even if auxiliary game starting ports are provided in addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment (for example, three are provided).

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 (sixth) in FIG. First, in step 1110, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball has entered (passed in case of a gate) into the first auxiliary game start port H10-1. . If Yes in step 1110, the process proceeds to step 1118. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1110, in Step 1114, the auxiliary game start port entrance judging means MJ11-H enters the game ball into the second auxiliary game start port H10-2 (inflow, if it is a gate) Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1114, in step 1118, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H determines an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game winning / non-decision random number, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number, an auxiliary game variation mode determining random number, Etc.). Next, in step 1122, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on how many pieces are held in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added. Next, in step 1124, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H generates an auxiliary game hold occurrence command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the hold random number generated by the auxiliary game side, A command related to information on whether the starting port that became the opportunity is the first auxiliary gaming starting port H10-1 or the second auxiliary gaming starting port H10-2, etc.) for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1200). In addition, also when it is No at step 1114 or step 1118, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. The difference from this embodiment is that step 1208 (sixth) to step 1211 (sixth), step 1225 (sixth), step 1230 (sixth), step 1231 (sixth), step 1233-1 (first 6), 12233-2 (sixth) and steps 1252 (sixth) to step 1256 (sixth), that is, in step 1206, when there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, step 1208 (sixth) Then, the auxiliary game win / fail lottery means MN11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to acquire the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), and also for auxiliary game pass / fail lottery. Referring to the table MN11ta-H (auxiliary game table 1), the auxiliary game side random number (auxiliary game side random number) based on the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the reserved ball is supplemented. Run the game propriety lottery temporarily stored in the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

  Here, FIG. 77 is an example of the auxiliary game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H (auxiliary game table 1). As shown in the figure, the sixth embodiment is configured such that when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, the probability that the auxiliary game winning lottery result is won is higher than when it is off. Yes. In addition, as exemplified in “Example of change of auxiliary game table 1”, there is no problem even if the allocation of random numbers for winning and losing in the auxiliary game winning lottery is changed.

  Next, in step 1209 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H (auxiliary game table 2), and the result of the executed lottery and the Based on the auxiliary game symbol random number (auxiliary game random number) based on the reserved ball, the stop symbol is determined and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, FIG. 77 is an example of the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H (auxiliary game table 2). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the random number distribution of the auxiliary game stop symbol is the same random number distribution regardless of whether the auxiliary game short time flag is on or off. In the present embodiment, the auxiliary game success / failure random number and the auxiliary game symbol random number are acquired as different random numbers. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, information related to success / failure is added to the auxiliary game symbol random number. You may comprise. In such a case, it is desirable to make the random number distribution of the auxiliary game stop symbol different depending on the game state on the auxiliary game side (in order to make the winning rate of the auxiliary game symbol different depending on the game state).

  Next, in step 1210 (sixth), the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H refers to the auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H (auxiliary game table 3), and the auxiliary game side game state ( Based on the auxiliary game variation mode random number (auxiliary game side random number) based on the holding ball and the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game variation time random flag, For example, 4 seconds is set when the auxiliary game short flag is on, and 10 seconds is set when the auxiliary game short flag is off.

  Here, FIG. 77 is an example of the auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H (auxiliary game table 3). As shown in the figure, in the sixth embodiment, when the auxiliary game short time flag is off, there are five types of variable time that can be determined, whereas when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, The type of variable time that can be determined is one type, and the type of variable time is greater when the auxiliary game short time flag is off. Further, when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, the auxiliary game symbol variation time is relatively short compared to when it is off. It should be noted that there is no problem if the variation mode (variation time) of the auxiliary game symbol is changed, but when the auxiliary game short time flag is off, there are a plurality of types of variation modes so that the player is not aware of the stop timing of the auxiliary game symbol. It is preferable to have a (variable time) (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is a winning symbol, the opening timing of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d related to the winning symbol is determined) In order to prevent the game ball from being launched), if the auxiliary game short flag is off, there is no problem even if the player detects the stop timing of the auxiliary game symbol, so the auxiliary game short flag is off. It is preferable that the configuration has fewer types of variation modes (variation time) than the case.

  Next, in step 1211 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is a command related to the determined auxiliary game symbol information and auxiliary game side game state information (a command to the sub side, and auxiliary game variation start is started). Command, etc.) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1220.

  If the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is reached in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H relates to the fact that the auxiliary game symbol is stopped and displayed in step 1225 (sixth). The command (command to the sub side) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit side (transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and step 1226 Migrate to In step 1228, after the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is turned off, in step 1230 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, It is determined whether or not the auxiliary game stop symbol is a winning symbol (L · S in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230 (sixth), in step 1231 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and the auxiliary game stop symbol is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol (L in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1231 (sixth), in step 1233-1 (sixth), the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the game state and the stop symbol on the auxiliary game side (this example) Then, based on L), the release mode (for example, 0.5 second open → 0.5 second closed → 5 second open → closed) is determined, and the second main game start opening electric accessory release timer MP22t-B is electrically operated. A predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the accessory is set, and the process proceeds to step 1234. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1231 (sixth), in step 1233-3 (sixth), the second main game start port electrical accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the game state and stop on the auxiliary game side. Based on the symbol (S in this example), an opening / closing mode (for example, 0.5 second open → closed) is determined, and the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B is set to open time ( A predetermined time related to the opening / closing time is set, and the process proceeds to step 1234.

  Here, FIG. 77 is an example of the electric accessory release time determination table MN81ta (auxiliary game table 3-1 and auxiliary game table 3-2). As shown in the figure, the sixth embodiment is configured such that the opening / closing mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is different depending on whether the auxiliary game short time flag is turned on or off and the auxiliary game side hit pattern. Has been. In the present embodiment, the one-time opening time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is the longest when the auxiliary game stop symbol is “L” and the auxiliary game short flag is off (in this example, 5 seconds). Note that the opening / closing mode in which the opening time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is the longest is referred to as a special opening / closing mode.

  In step 1236, after the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened, in step 1248 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. The open / close mode set is a special open / close mode (“0.5 second open → 0.5 second close → 5 second open → close”), the auxiliary game stop symbol is “L”, and the auxiliary It is determined whether or not it is an opening / closing mode that can be set when the game time short flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1248 (sixth), in step 1252 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is a special opening / closing mode start command (a command to the sub side, and the opening time related to the special opening / closing mode. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), The process proceeds to 1242. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1202 or Step 1248 (Sixth), the process proceeds to Step 1242.

  In step 1246, after turning off the electric-power-assist opening flag, in step 1254 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, The set opening / closing mode is a special opening / closing mode (“0.5 second open → 0.5 second closed → 5 second open → closed”), the auxiliary game stop symbol is “L”, and the auxiliary game short time flag It is determined whether or not it is an open / close mode that can be set when is off. In the case of Yes in step 1254 (sixth), in step 1256 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is a special opening / closing mode end command (a command to the sub-side, and the opening time related to the special switching mode) Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), The process proceeds to the process (step 1300). It should be noted that if the answer is No in step 1230 (sixth) or step 1254 (sixth), the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1300).

  Next, FIG. 78 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3100 (sixth), step 3400 (sixth), step 3500 (sixth), step 3600 (sixth), and step 3700 (sixth). In (sixth), the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes a hold information management / hold display control process to be described later, and proceeds to step 2200. In addition, after the execution of the decorative symbol display control process in step 2300, in step 3400 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a sub game display content determination process for auxiliary games, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500 (sixth), the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes auxiliary game secondary game display control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 3600 (sixth), the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes a hold information prior determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2400. Further, after executing the special game related display control process in step 2400, in step 3700 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a sub game display area size change control process described later, Control goes to step 2700.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of hold information management / hold display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a new hold occurrence command on the auxiliary game side has been received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 adds 1 to the auxiliary game hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3106, the on-holding information display control means SM22 displays the information on the starting port and the auxiliary game-side random number received from the main control board M as a trigger for the on-hold generation on the auxiliary game side. The information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to Step 3116. In the sixth embodiment, the random number value is directly transmitted from the main control board M side, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the symbol information derived from the main control board M side based on the random number value (derived in advance before symbol variation) (pre-judgment result, stop symbol, variation mode, etc.) is transmitted. It may be configured. On the other hand, if No in step 3102, in step 3108, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b, and new symbol information (in other words, from the main control board M side to the auxiliary game side) Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation is started). In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts 1 from the auxiliary game hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 3112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the auxiliary game side random number related to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information (holding digestion). To do. In step 3114, the effect display control means SM20 turns on the auxiliary game sub-game content determination permission flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3116. In the case of No in step 3108, the process proceeds to step 3116. In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured not to display the auxiliary game hold number, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the auxiliary game hold number may be displayed.

  Next, in step 3116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and has received a new hold occurrence command on the first main game side from the main control board M side. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 3116, in step 3118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 adds 1 to the first main game drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3120, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the winning order and the first main game side random number related to the hold information on the first main game side received from the main control board M side. Temporary storage is performed in the temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to Step 3130. In step 3130, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the same number of hold displays as the first main game drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in the first hold display section SG12). The displayed lamp image is hereinafter referred to as a first main game drawing hold lamp), and the process proceeds to step 3132. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3116, in step 3122, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and new symbol information from the main control board M side to the first main game side. It is determined whether or not (in other words, symbol variation starts) is received. In the case of Yes in step 3122, in step 3124, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts 1 from the first main game drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3126, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the first main game side random number related to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information (holding). Digest. Then, in step 3128, the effect display control means SM20 turns on the main game supplementary sub game content determination permission flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3130. In the case of No in step 3122, the process proceeds to step 3132.

  Next, at step 3132, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and has received a new hold occurrence command on the second main game side from the main control board M side. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 3132, in step 3134, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 adds 1 to the second main game drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3136, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the winning order and the second main game side random number related to the hold information on the second main game side received from the main control board M side. Temporary storage is performed in the temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to Step 3146. In step 3146, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the same number of hold displays as the second main game drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in the second hold display section SG13). The displayed lamp image is hereinafter referred to as a second main game equipment hold lamp), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3132, in step 3138, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and new symbol information from the main control board M side to the second main game side. It is determined whether or not (in other words, symbol variation starts) is received. In the case of Yes in step 3138, in step 3140, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts (decrements) 1 from the second main game drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3142, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the second main game random number related to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information (holding). Digest. In step 3144, the effect display control means SM20 turns on the auxiliary game content determination permission flag for the main game supplement in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3146. In the case of No in step 3138, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of auxiliary game secondary game display content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 3400 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in the sixth embodiment, an object is to make it possible to execute a variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a roulette effect) of a decorative symbol corresponding to an auxiliary game symbol. The variable display result is configured to notify or suggest not only the game result on the auxiliary game side but also the game result on the main game side. First, in step 3402, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the auxiliary game sub game content determination permission flag in the notice effect related temporary information storage means SM24b is on. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n turns off the auxiliary game sub game content determination permission flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3406, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n is temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the auxiliary game side game state information transmitted from the main control board M side in step 1211. Confirm. Next, in step 3408, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the auxiliary gaming side gaming state is in a non-time-reduced game based on the gaming state confirmation result. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3450 (sixth), the roulette effect content determination means SM27n executes auxiliary game sub game content determination processing described later. That is, the roulette effect described later is configured to be executed only during the non-time-saving game state.

  Next, in step 3420, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines the roulette effect execution permission flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (ON / OFF is determined in the auxiliary game sub-game content determining process described later). It is determined whether or not (flag) is ON. In the case of Yes in step 3420, in step 3422, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n turns off the roulette effect execution permission flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3424, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines the final result of the roulette effect (the sub game content determination process for auxiliary games, which will be described later, in this example, “losing”, “auxiliary game winning” and Based on the symbol information from the main control board M (particularly, the variation time value of the auxiliary game symbol), referring to the roulette effect content determination lottery table SM27ta, The effect mode and execution timing of the roulette effect are determined and temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Here, FIG. 81 (sub game table 2-1) is an example of a roulette effect content determination lottery table SM27ta (particularly, a roulette effect effect mode and execution timing determination table). As shown in this example, the sixth embodiment is configured such that the effect mode and execution timing of the roulette effect are determined by lottery based on the variation time value of the auxiliary game symbol and the final result of the roulette effect. . For example, when the variation time value of the auxiliary game symbol is “10.0 seconds” and the final result of the roulette effect is “losing”, “roulette effect 1” and “roulette effect 2” are the roulette effect effect modes. Are determined at the ratios of selection probabilities “500/512” and “12/512”, respectively, and the execution timing of the roulette effect is determined to be “5.0 seconds”. Then, as will be described later, the roulette arrangement pattern displayed in the roulette effect is determined based on the roulette effect production mode, and when the execution timing of the roulette effect is reached, the display of the determined roulette array pattern is triggered. Will be started. It should be noted that the effect mode, execution timing, and selection probability of the roulette effect are merely examples, and are not limited thereto.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, at step 3426, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n is based on the determined roulette effect effect mode (temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). The roulette arrangement pattern displayed in the roulette effect is determined with reference to the effect content determination lottery table SM27ta, and temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Here, FIG. 81 (sub game table 2-2) is an example of a roulette effect content determination lottery table SM27ta (particularly a roulette arrangement pattern determination table). As shown in this example, in the sixth embodiment, the roulette arrangement pattern displayed in the roulette effect is uniquely determined based on the effect mode of the roulette effect. For example, if the production mode of the roulette production is “roulette production 1”, any one of “−”, “electrical appliance release”, and “open prize opening” in each of the roulette piece numbers 0 to 9 An arrangement pattern (roulette arrangement pattern 1) is arranged so as to be displayed. Here, “Electrical character opening” means the display content for notifying that the second main game start opening electric character B11d is opened, while “Large winning opening” is the first. This means that the display content is to notify that the special winning opening C10 or the second special winning opening C20 is opened (shifts to special game). That is, as will be described later, the contents that can be notified as the final result of the roulette effect include not only the result of the auxiliary game side but also the result of the main game side. In addition, the display content arranged in each piece is not limited to this, and may be display content that suggests the result of the auxiliary game side and the result of the main game side (for example, roulette). As shown in the arrangement pattern 2, when the frame “open !?” is stopped and displayed, a display for notifying that there is a possibility that the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d may be opened. When the content is displayed, or when the frame “Chance!” Is stopped and displayed, the content is displayed to notify that there is a possibility of shifting to the special game, or the frame “Open!” Is displayed. Is displayed as a display to notify that it is determined that the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d will be opened, or the frame “Gekiatsu !!” is displayed as a stop. If it is, it will be confirmed that the game will shift to special games. And display contents for informing the fact, etc.). Note that the roulette where the winning on the auxiliary game side is definitive like the roulette array pattern 4 is selected only when the auxiliary game side is winning, but can be selected when the auxiliary game side is winning. It is desirable that the roulette arrangement pattern is configured to be hardly selected (or relatively difficult to select) among the roulette arrangement patterns. In addition, when the auxiliary game side is a win, as the content that can be notified as the final result of the roulette performance, a piece indicating the win on the auxiliary game side such as “open !?”, “open !!” is relatively It is desirable to make it easy to stop display and to make it difficult to stop and display a piece indicating the non-winning side on the auxiliary game side such as “-”, such as “open !?”, “open !!” It may be configured such that only the frames suggesting the winning side are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the main game side is winning, the content that can be notified as the final result of the roulette effect is relatively a frame indicating the main game side winning such as “Super Hot!”, “Chance!” It is desirable that a stop display is easy and a piece such as “-” indicating a non-winning side on the main game side is relatively difficult to stop and display. In addition, when the auxiliary game side is winning, “the stop display ratio of pieces suggesting the winning side of the auxiliary game side: the stop display ratio of pieces suggesting the non-winning side of the auxiliary game side = 9: 1”, and the main game side In the case of winning, the auxiliary game side is winning, such as “stop display ratio of pieces suggesting winning on the main game side: stop display ratio of pieces suggesting non-winning on the main game side = 1: 1”. In this case, it is desirable that the stop display ratio of the piece indicating the winning of the main game side when the main game side is winning is lower than the stop display ratio of the piece indicating the winning of the auxiliary game side in the case . Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the opening / closing mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is a special opening / closing mode in the non-time-saving game state (or the state where the auxiliary game time-short flag is off). Is configured to always execute the roulette effect (when the auxiliary game side is won), while the roulette effect is executed only in part when the main game is a big hit. However, the execution frequency of the roulette effect may be changed. For example, the roulette effect related to the win on the auxiliary game side may be a long time such as super reach when the main game side is won. This is always executed when no change time (for example, a change time of 60 seconds or more) is selected, and the roulette effect relating to the winning of the main game is executed at 5% of the case where the main game is won, etc. Percentage roulette effect for winning the auxiliary game side is performed, it is desirable to configure to be higher than the rate at which the roulette demonstration is performed for winning the main game side.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 3428, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines the roulette frame number as the stop display position for notifying the final result based on the final result of the roulette effect and the roulette arrangement pattern. (For example, if the final result = "losing", one of the pieces marked with "-" is assigned, and if the final result = "auxiliary game winning", "Electric power release" is assigned. If the final result = “main game winning”, determine one of the pieces with “Large winning opening open”) and temporarily store it in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b To do. Next, in step 3430, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n turns on the auxiliary game sub game content determination flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and performs the next process {process of step 3500 (sixth)}. Migrate to In addition, also in the case of No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3420, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3500 (sixth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of auxiliary game sub game content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3450 (sixth) in FIG. 80 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3452, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and confirms the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol transmitted from the main control board M side in step 1211. Next, in step 3454, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “L” based on the confirmation result, in other words, the stop display of the auxiliary game symbol. Later, it is determined whether or not the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is to execute the special opening / closing mode. In the case of Yes in step 3454, in step 3456, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is based on the entry to the first auxiliary game start port H10-1. It is determined whether or not there is. If Yes in step 3456, the final result of the roulette effect is determined as “auxiliary game winning” in step 3458. In step 3488, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n turns on the roulette effect execution permission flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the next process {process of step 3420 (sixth)}. Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3454, in step 3462, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines the final result of the roulette effect as “losing”. Here, the determination is a provisional determination. As described later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the final result of the roulette effect is replaced from “losing” to “main game winning”. In the sixth embodiment, the predetermined conditions include “executability determination processing based on the number of main game symbols held”, “executability determination processing based on fluctuation status of main game symbols”, “sub game for main game” 4 examples of “executability determination process 1 based on the execution status of the game” and “executability determination processing 2 based on the execution status of the secondary game for the main game” are given.

(Execution decision processing based on the number of reserved main game symbols)
Next, at step 3464, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether the roulette effect can be executed with a predetermined lottery probability based on the first main game drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Execute. Here, as an example of the execution availability lottery, when the first main game drawing hold counter value is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the probability is higher than the case of the predetermined number or more. It can be configured to win. Next, at step 3466, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the execution availability lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3466, the process proceeds to step 3468, whereas in the case of No in step 3466, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3420 (sixth)}.

(Execution decision processing based on the change status of the main game)
Next, at step 3468, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether the in-figure changing flag in the flag area of the notice effect related temporary information storage means SM24b is on, in other words, the main game symbol. It is determined whether or not the decorative symbol which is the corresponding sub game is being displayed in a variable manner. In the case of No in step 3468, the process proceeds to step 3488. In the case of Yes in step 3468, in step 3470, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines the timer value Ts of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the main control. The auxiliary game symbol variation time value Th transmitted from the board M side is confirmed, “Ts + Th” is calculated, and the final temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b It is compared with a time value Te (in this example, the temporary stop timing in the middle row). Next, in step 3472, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the condition “Ts + Th <Te” is satisfied based on the comparison result. If Yes in step 3472, the process proceeds to step 3474, while if No in step 3472, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3420). Here, a supplementary explanation will be given for this processing. In the case where the condition of “Ts + Th <Te” is satisfied, the game result on the main game side (the content of the stop symbol of the main game symbol) is clearly notified before The final result of the roulette effect is informed. That is, as a final result of the roulette effect, it is ensured that the game result on the main game side cannot be changed when notifying the game result on the main game side being executed concurrently. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a situation where the game result on the main game side can change, in other words, the roulette effect may be executed across a plurality of variations of the main game symbol. In that case, the final result of the roulette effect is the game result on the main game side that is being executed at the end of the roulette effect (the game result related to the hold on the main game side that has not been digested at the time of determining the roulette effect content) ) May be determined in advance. Further, as in this example, when the main control board M side is configured so that a plurality of types of change time can be selected as the change time value of the auxiliary game symbol, “Ts + Th <Te” on the main control board M side. In other words, it can be adjusted by forcibly selecting a shorter variation time as the variation time value of the auxiliary game symbol so that it falls within the remaining variation time of the main game symbol. You may comprise.

(Execution determination process 1 based on the execution status of the secondary game for the main game)
Next, in step 3474, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n, the variation pattern of the decorative design temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the display timing of the notice effect and the notice effect type to be displayed, and Based on the timer value Ts of the drawing change time management timer SM21t, the notice effect display period related to a specific notice effect (in this example, the notice effect type 2) is confirmed. For example, when the timer value Ts is 5 seconds (after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol variation) and the display of the notice effect type 2 is determined, the notice effect type 2 is 5 seconds to 10 seconds later. This is the notice effect display period. Next, at step 3476, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the notice effect display period overlaps with the execution period of the roulette effect based on the confirmation result. If Yes in step 3476, the process proceeds to step 3478, while if No in step 3476, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3420). Here, a supplementary explanation of this process will be described. The specific notice effect means an effect that determines whether or not the notice effect is displayed depending on whether or not the sub input button can be operated. This is an effect in which a message prompting is displayed. That is, in this way, when an effect that requires an operation action by the player is being executed, the execution of the roulette effect is canceled.

(Execution determination process 2 based on the execution status of the secondary game for the main game)
Next, in step 3478, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n is predetermined based on the decorative pattern variation mode temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage device SM24b and the timer value Ts of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. The lottery effect execution lottery is executed with the lottery probability. Here, as an example of the execution availability lottery, if the execution period of the roulette effect falls within the period before the design change of the decorative design reaches the reach, the execution period of the roulette effect within the period before the reach occurs It can be mentioned that it is configured to win with a high probability compared to the case where does not fit. Next, at step 3480, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the execution availability lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3480, the process proceeds to step 3482. If No in step 3480, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3420). Here, a supplementary explanation of this process is that the effect that is being executed after the reach is an effect that should be watched by the player. In particular, in the predetermined period after the reach, the game result on the main game side will be any result. In some cases, it is expressed by a highly interesting performance. That is, in this way, when a highly entertaining effect is being executed, the execution of the roulette effect is easily canceled.

  After the roulette effect execution possibility determination process is performed as described above, in step 3482, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the main game symbol that is scheduled to be stopped is displayed. Check the stop symbol (or stop symbol of the decorative symbol). Next, at step 3484, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not to stop display with the big hit symbol based on the confirmation result. In the case of No in step 3484, the process proceeds to step 3488. In the case of Yes in step 3484, in step 3486, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n changes the final result of the roulette effect from “lost” to “main game winning”. To step 3488. In the case of No in step 3456, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3420 (sixth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game secondary game display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 3500 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3502, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the auxiliary game sub game content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 turns off the auxiliary game sub game content determination flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3506, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 turns on the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 3508, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 starts the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM27t, and proceeds to step 3510. In the case of No in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3510.

  Next, in step 3510, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the roulette effect execution monitoring flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3510, in step 3512, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 executes the roulette effect in which the timer value of the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM27t is temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not the timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3512, in step 3514, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 uses a display area different from “display area 1” in the main game decoration symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. Thus, the “display area 2” which is a display area for a predetermined number of frames (3 frames) in the roulette array pattern is displayed. Next, in step 3516, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines each frame (in this example, roulette frame numbers 0 to 0) based on the roulette arrangement pattern temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. 9) are sequentially displayed within the “display area 2” in a low-speed fluctuation manner (for example, a fluctuation display at the number of passing seconds per frame = 0.3 frames). Next, at step 3518, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines whether or not the roulette array pattern has made one turn by the variation display. In the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines each frame (in this example, roulette based on the roulette arrangement pattern temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Each frame number 0 to 9) is sequentially displayed in high-speed fluctuation in the “display area 2” (for example, fluctuating display at one frame passing time = 0.1 frame). In the case of No in step 3512 or step 3518, the process proceeds to step 3530.

  Next, in Step 3530, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3530, in step 3532 the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 has reached the timing at which the final result of the roulette effect can be notified, in other words, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. (For example, in the roulette effect during the variable display, the roulette frame number serving as the stop display position and the frame numbers before and after the display are shaken and displayed in the “display area 2”). Next, in Step 3534, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the notification. In the case of Yes in step 3534, in step 3536, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 stops the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM27t and resets the timer value (zero clear). Next, in step 3538, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 confirms and displays the roulette frame number serving as the stop display position in the roulette effect in the “display area 2” (not shown in this example, The result of the roulette effect may be notified before the auxiliary game symbol variation ends). Next, at step 3540, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 turns off the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3541, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines whether or not the final result of the executed roulette effect is “auxiliary game winning” (the final result of the roulette effect is step 3458 or step 3462). In the case of Yes in step 3541, in step 3542, the during-release effect display control means SM29 turns on the during-release effect execution permission flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3544. Note that if the answer is No in Step 3510, Step 3530, Step 3534, or Step 3541, the process proceeds to Step 3544.

  Next, in step 3544, the during-release effect display control means SM29 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the during-release effect execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3544, in step 3546, the opening effect display control means SM29 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special opening / closing mode start command has been newly received from the main side. . In the case of Yes in step 3546, in step 3548, the opening effect display control means SM29 executes the opening effect (the effect that the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is being opened in the special opening / closing mode). The command to be set is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 3550. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3546, the process proceeds to step 3550.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened in a special opening / closing mode based on the entry of the game ball into the second auxiliary game start opening H10-2, it is opened. Although the medium performance is configured not to be executed, when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the special opening / closing mode at the time of return from the power interruption (that is, opened in the special opening / closing mode) When the power is turned off and then returned), the opening effect can be executed even if the opening is due to the entry of a game ball into the second auxiliary game starting port H10-2. It may be configured.

  Next, in step 3550, the during-opening effect display control means SM29 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special opening / closing mode end command has been newly received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 3550, in step 3552, the opening effect display control means SM29 sets a command to end the opening effect being executed (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub sub control unit SS side). To be sent). Next, in step 3554, the during-opening effect display control means SM29 turns off the during-opening effect execution permission in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the next process {step 3600 (sixth) The process proceeds to. In addition, also when it is No in step 3544 or step 3550, it transfers to the next process {process of step 3600 (sixth)}.

  In the sixth embodiment, the roulette array pattern displayed in step 3516 and the roulette array pattern displayed in step 3520 are configured to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, for example, when “roulette effect 3” is executed as the effect mode of the roulette effect, in other words, when the final result of the roulette effect is obvious by the roulette arrangement pattern, The roulette array pattern displayed in step 3516 displays an array pattern (for example, roulette array pattern 1 or 2) that does not reveal the final result of the roulette effect, and the final result of the roulette effect in step 3520. It is possible to exemplify a configuration that replaces with a roulette arrangement pattern in which is obvious. Further, in this example, the timing at which the final result of the roulette effect can be notified is the time when the predetermined game time has elapsed after the auxiliary game symbol is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the auxiliary game symbol is stopped and displayed. You may comprise so that the final result of a roulette effect may be alert | reported before this.

  In the sixth embodiment, the roulette effect is executed in conjunction with the auxiliary game symbol variation. However, the roulette effect is only an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. It is possible to execute a roulette effect at an appropriate timing according to both the main game symbol variation and the auxiliary game symbol variation, or to execute the roulette effect at an appropriate timing without being linked to any variation. (The roulette effect execution time may be adjusted as appropriate, so that even if the roulette effect is started without being linked to the symbol fluctuation, the result of the big hit, the electric tulong opening and the result of the roulette effect will be generated. It is possible not to let).

  In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is long opened in the special opening and closing mode, the opening is started and at the same time the opening effect can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened with an opening pattern (special opening / closing mode) of 0.5 second opening → 0.5 second closing → 5.0 second opening. Further, after the opening for 0.5 seconds is completed (for example, before the opening for 5.0 seconds is started), the effect during opening may be started.

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the hold information prior determination process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3601, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3601, in step 3602, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 confirms the auxiliary game drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3604, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 determines whether or not the auxiliary game drawing hold counter value has increased based on the confirmation result, in other words, the auxiliary game side hold number increases. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3604, in step 3610, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 preliminarily determines the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol based on the auxiliary game side random number related to the increased auxiliary game side hold.

  Next, in step 3612, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the increased holding is entered (or passed) into the first auxiliary game start opening H10-2. It is determined whether or not the hold has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3612, in step 3614, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “L” based on the prior determination result. In the case of Yes in step 3614, in step 3616, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 opens / closes the light effect (second main game start opening electric accessory B11d based on a predetermined lottery probability (for example, 2/3)). A lottery for determining whether or not an aspect may be a special aspect may be performed, and the process proceeds to Step 3620. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3618, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 determines the light emission effect (second main game start port electric accessory B11d based on a predetermined lottery probability (for example, 1/30). The opening / closing mode is executed in a lottery (execution of notifying that there is a possibility that the opening / closing mode is likely to be a special mode), and the process proceeds to Step 3620.

  Next, in Step 3620, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 refers to the execution availability lottery result executed in Step 3616 or Step 3618, and determines whether or not the execution availability lottery has been won. In the sixth embodiment, when the execution availability lottery executed in step 3616 is won, the opening / closing mode of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is a special mode triggered by the increased holding. On the other hand, if the execution availability lottery executed in step 3618 is won, the opening / closing mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d does not become a special mode triggered by the increased holding. Configured to be scheduled. In the case of Yes in step 3620, in step 3622, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 issues a command for executing an effect (the light emission effect described above) in which the auxiliary game decoration symbol in the auxiliary game decoration symbol display area SG11-H emits light. Set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2700), and proceed to the next process (process in step 3700). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400) also in the case of No in step 3601, step 3604, step 3612 or step 3620.

  In the sixth embodiment, the light-emitting effect can be executed only in the non-time-saving gaming state, but the light-emitting effect may be executed even in the time-saving gaming state (for example, When the auxiliary game symbol “L” to be won is scheduled to be stopped, a lottery for determining whether or not to perform the light emission effect is executed, etc.). Moreover, in 6th Embodiment, although it comprised so that the effect which an auxiliary | assistant game decoration symbol light-emits was performed as a reservation prefetching effect, it is not limited to this, For example, the stop symbol of an auxiliary | assistant game is a specific lose pattern. When the display area of the roulette effect is always displayed and the display area is made to emit light or the auxiliary game equipment diagram hold is displayed, the display mode of the auxiliary game equipment figure hold is changed, A light emitting unit may be provided in the two main game start opening electric accessory B11d so that the light emitting unit is lit.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of sub game display area size change control processing according to the subroutine of Step 3700 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3702, the effect display size change control means SM28 determines whether or not the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b is on, in other words, the roulette effect is being executed (or It is determined whether or not the status is “waiting for execution”. In the case of Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the effect display size change control means SM28 confirms the final result relating to the roulette effect being executed (or waiting for execution). Next, in step 3706, the effect display size change control means SM28 determines whether or not the final result of the roulette effect is “auxiliary game winning” based on the confirmation result. In the case of Yes in step 3706, in step 3708, the effect display size change control means SM28 determines whether or not the roulette effect is being executed (whether or not the execution timing of the roulette effect has been reached). In the case of Yes in step 3708, in step 3710, the effect display size change control means SM28 changes the display size of “display area 2” to “display area 1” in the main game decoration symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. "Is enlarged and displayed (the display image is shown outside the box), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3800). In the case of No in step 3702, step 3706, or step 3708, in step 3712, the effect display size change control means SM28 displays “display area 1” in the main game decoration symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. Is displayed larger than the display size of “display area 2” (the display image is illustrated outside the box, but “display area 2” may be configured to be deleted), and the following processing ( The process proceeds to step 2700. In the process of step 3706, even if the final result of the roulette effect is “losing” or a part of “main game winning”, the determination may be made Yes.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, during the non-time-reduced game, the second main game is performed in the auxiliary game related to entering the first auxiliary game start opening H10-1. When the start opening electric accessory B11d is opened long in a special opening / closing mode, a pre-reading effect (in this example, a light emission effect), a changing effect (in this example, a roulette effect), and an effect during opening can be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by encouraging the player's expectation regarding the long opening that can store the second main game hold advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the auxiliary game related to the ball entering the second auxiliary game start opening H10-2 (the auxiliary game which is irregularly generated in order to execute the left-handed game normally in the non-time-reduced game state), the second main game Even when the game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened for a long time in a special opening / closing mode, the effect as described above is not executed. As a result, even if the player plays an irregular game (for example, right-handed) during the non-time-reduced gaming state, it is difficult to enjoy the benefit of the long opening of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. The execution of a typical game can be suppressed.

  In this example, during the special game, it is configured to be able to execute the changing effect (roulette effect) and the opening effect at the time of change based on the entry to the second auxiliary game start port H10-2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pre-reading effect (light emission effect) may be executed, or only an effect during opening may be executed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the effect for exclusive use at the time of long-opening the 2nd main game start opening electrically-driven accessory B11d in a special opening-and-closing aspect during a special game may be performed.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, during the non-time-reduced game, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is put into a special opening / closing mode in the auxiliary game related to the ball entering the first auxiliary game start port H10-1. When the game ball is made to enter the second main game start opening B10 when the game is released for a long time, the effect during the symbol change related to the input is the non-time-reduced game state and the first main game. It is good also as a special mode which is an effect mode which is not performed during the side symbol fluctuation. In such a configuration, (1) when determining the variation time on the second main game side, the selection candidate of the variation time that can be selected does not depend on the number of holds on the second main game side, (2) The special mode effect can be executed in the non-time-reduced gaming state, and (3) in the non-time-reduced game state, the pre-reading effect on the first main game side can be executed, but the second main The pre-reading effect relating to the game side may not be executed, and may include only one configuration of (1) to (3), or may include a plurality of configurations at the same time.

  In the sixth embodiment, the above-described special second large winning opening C20 is configured (the maximum number of game balls can enter even in a small hit game), and the second main game side small Winning probability (in this example, normal gaming state, time-reduced gaming state, 160/1024 for both), winning rate (probability fluctuation) of 10 times or more of big winning probability in normal gaming state (3/1024 in this example) The upper limit that the probability of winning big wins by function is less than 10 times), and by winning the small hit on the second main game side (by entering the V winning opening C22), winning the real big win In the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the game is progressing left-handed, the auxiliary game related to entering the first auxiliary game starting port H10-1 2 special game start opening B11d in a special opening and closing mode It becomes long open, and game balls can enter the second big prize opening C20 by hitting right, and in the non-time-reduced game state, the real big hit by entering the first auxiliary game start opening H10-1 It will be possible to create a novel game that gives you the chance to win.

  In addition, the sixth embodiment is configured so that a parallel lottery in which the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be drawn at the same time (and can be varied) can be executed. In such a configuration, the second main game side may not have a holding function (the second main game holding upper limit number may be 0). In addition, the structure which can perform parallel lottery is explained in full detail in 7th Embodiment.

  In addition, as a configuration of the sixth embodiment, (1) the auxiliary game time short flag off, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation in which the result on the auxiliary game side is lost may be all short (for example, the fluctuation time that can be selected) (2) Only one type of “1 second”, etc.), (2) In the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the second main game wins a small hit, after the big hit with the small hit as an opportunity The average value of the number of time reductions is less than the average value of the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit when the second main game is won in the time-saving gaming state, (3) In the non-time-saving game state, when the second main game side wins a small hit, the time-saving game state transition rate after the big hit with the small hit as an opportunity is the second main game in the time-saving game state When winning a small hit on the side, the big hit triggered by the small hit Ri is lower than the time shortening game state transition rate after completion may be configured as.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the configuration of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is such that the entrance efficiency with respect to the launched game ball is high, such as the second big winning opening C20 of this example. For example, it is arranged so that the second main game start port B10 is stacked below the first main game start port A10, and almost all of the game balls fired by either left-handed or right-handed are started in the second main game. There is a guiding member for guiding the game ball to the second main game start port B10 in the left and right direction of the second main game start port B10, flowing down the vicinity of the mouth B10, and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d Almost all game balls guided to the guide member during opening may be configured to enter the second main game start opening B10.

  In the sixth embodiment, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened as “short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) open → medium time (for example, 0.5 seconds) closed → long It is good also as "time (for example, 4 second) opening". The time value is “short time <medium time <long time”. In addition, during the closing period of the middle time, an effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the second main game start opening B10 (in this example, right-handed) may be executed.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, a common entrance that is an entrance into which game balls can enter and an entrance that can enter game balls are provided downstream of the common entrance. A first main game start opening, a game entrance into which a game ball can enter, an auxiliary game start opening provided downstream of the common entrance, and a game that has entered the common entrance A member that changes the flow direction of the ball toward one of the first main game start port and the auxiliary game start port, and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance port are the first main game start port and A sorting member that operates so that it can be alternately distributed to the auxiliary game starting port, and the sorting member is equally distributed to the first main game starting port and the auxiliary game starting port by the weight of the game ball. Or the sorting member is driven electrically and is equally distributed to the first main game start port and the auxiliary game start port It may be configured as not.

(Seventh embodiment)
In the embodiments shown so far, one first main game start opening A10 is provided, and the variation on the second main game side is executed in preference to the variation on the first main game side. In this example, it is possible to create a new game with a configuration different from the configuration. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a seventh embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the seventh embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied in the seventh embodiment.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment executes a parallel lottery in which the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be drawn simultaneously (and can be varied). Configured to get. During the special game, the main game symbol that has changed is configured to pause. In addition, the first main game start opening is the same position as the present embodiment (left first main game start opening), and it is easy to enter the ball with the right hand, but it is difficult (or not) to enter with the left hand. And (positioned as the right first main game start opening).

  First, FIG. 86 is a game progress flowchart in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the game flow shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail.

<Game progress flow 1>
In the “normal game” shown in the figure (the second main game start opening electric player B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to be in an open state, so-called non-electric support state), the player is left first main game A game ball is fired aiming at the starting port (so-called left-handed) to advance the game. Then, when winning a big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, a big hit probability = 1/256), which is triggered by entering the first main game start opening A10, as shown in the figure. After winning the first main game big win, and after the symbol change of the first main game based on the win is finished (after the big win symbol of the first main game is stopped), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( For example, 10R) special games are executed. While the special game is being executed, the game is advanced by making a right turn.

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> is completed, the “short time” shown in the figure (the game state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is likely to be in an open state, so-called Since the transition to the electric support state = short time state), the player aims to aim at the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d and launches the game ball (performs so-called right-handed) to advance the game, It is possible to efficiently enter the second main game start opening B10 (the entry into the second main game start opening B10 is a chance to win the lottery on the second main game side and change the design of the second main game design) Is done). Further, in the seventh embodiment, two first main game start ports are provided, the left first main game start port is easy to enter by left-handed, and the right first main game start port is right Since it is easy to enter the game by hitting, the game ball enters the right first main game start port during execution of the special game related to the first main game, so at the end of the special game, the first main game hold is An upper limit number (for example, 4) has occurred.

<Game progress flow 3>
The “short time” shown in the figure is configured to continue until the first main game symbol ends 10 times or the second main game symbol ends 100 times. Here, in the seventh embodiment, the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are configured to be variable at the same time (so-called parallel lottery is configured to be executable). The change of the first main game symbol related to entering the right first main game start port and the change of the second main game symbol related to entering the second main game start port B10 are executed simultaneously. It becomes. In addition, in the winning lottery related to the second main game side, when winning a small hit at 1/10 and winning the small hit, the big win is caused by the entry to the V winning opening C22 during the small hit. It will be executed again, and it will shift to the time-saving game state again, and the number of hours will be reset (even if it wins a big hit, it will change to the time-saving game state again and the number of times reduced will be reset). In “medium”, since the variation of the first main game symbol is also executed, when the first main game symbol has been varied ten times, the “short time” shown in the diagram will be terminated. . Therefore, in the “short-to-medium”, it is a game characteristic of how many times it can be achieved that the second main game side wins a big hit or a small hit before the first main game symbol is changed 10 times. ing. In the “short time”, the average value of the variation time of the first main game symbol is 5 seconds, and the average value of the variation time of the second main game symbol is 5 seconds. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the average value of the game balls that can be acquired in “short time” is the average variation time of the first main game symbol of “short time” and the second main game of “short time”. It is configured to be determined by the average value of the symbol variation time, the number of time savings of the first main game symbol, and the small hit probability on the second main game side. In addition, if the average value of the variation time of the first main game symbol of “short time medium”, the number of time reductions of the first main game symbol, and the small hit probability on the second main game side become large (high), The average value of the game balls that can be acquired in the “short time” is large, and the average value of the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the “short time” is large, the average value of the game balls that can be acquired in the “short time” is It is configured to be small. It should be noted that in “short time”, it may be configured such that a long time variation time (for example, 50 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first main game symbol. In such a configuration, it is desirable to perform a dedicated effect such as an effect that informs the player that the profit is high during the long-term fluctuation. In addition, when the first main game has ended fluctuating 10 times (changes for the number of time reductions) in the “short time” shown in the figure, transition to the “normal game” shown in the figure. It becomes.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, the parallel lottery can be executed, and the time-reduced gaming state is continued until the first main gaming symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel gameability of how many times it can be achieved that the second main game side wins a big or small win before the first main game symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times. It becomes.

  In addition, in 7th Embodiment, you may comprise so that it may be difficult for a player to discriminate | determine the variation time of the 1st main game symbol in a time reduction game state. An effect that makes it appear that the shortened gaming state is configured to end (such as making the first main game symbol stop timing difficult to understand) may be executed, and when the remaining time runs out, the time shortening gaming state ends. It is possible to execute an effect such that the remaining time increases at an arbitrary timing in the time-saving gaming state.

  Moreover, in 7th Embodiment, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a limited frequency state with a small hit symbol as an opportunity, and when a certain small hit symbol stops, the change time of the 1st main game symbol after the stop timing concerned May be configured to be relatively long.

  Note that the gaming machine according to this example always performs a right strike (does not switch to the left strike) in a highly profitable state, so a right-hand exclusive button (a game ball while pressing the button) May be fired at the maximum intensity regardless of the twisting of the firing handle D44.

  In the gaming machine according to the present example, a time limiter (a continuous winning upper limit number of special games in the time-reduced gaming state is provided, and after the execution of the special game that reaches the number of times, the non-time-reduced gaming state is entered. In the non-time-reduced gaming state, the game performance is such that when a small win is won due to a change related to the second main game suspension, the execution of the special game three times or more is almost promised at the following timing. Also good.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game ball is not entered at the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game won in the time reduction gaming state, the V winning detection effect is not executed, and You may comprise so that the production | generation (for example, unfortunate atmosphere production) of the aspect different from V prize detection production | presentation may be performed. In addition, during the small hit game that is won during the time-saving game state, when the game ball enters at the first opening of the second big prize opening C20 (does not enter the V prize opening C22), the first V A winning detection effect may be executed and the second V winning detection effect may be executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 after the second opening of the second big winning opening C20 thereafter. The first V winning detection effect and the second V winning detection effect are configured such that the second winning detection effect has higher visibility (is conspicuous).

  In this example (especially in the present embodiment), a period advantageous for the player (a section in which the number of balls can be continuously increased) is the first main game side elected in the non-time-reduced gaming state. Since this is a series of periods from the start of the execution of the special game to the transition to the non-time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game and the absence of the second main game hold, this series of periods In order to output to the hall computer HC that the game has continued, first, a predetermined external signal (so-called external signal) is determined from the start timing of the special game related to the first main game that is won in the non-time-saving game state. (The signal output from one terminal on the terminal board) is turned on (and kept on thereafter), and thereafter, after the special game is over, the game shifts to the non-time-reduced gaming state and the second main game suspension does not exist. timing The predetermined external signal that you configured to OFF is suitable Te.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time reduction gaming state is configured to end at the end of the fluctuation when the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c becomes 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final time in the time reduction gaming state is not limited to this. If you win a small hit by change (the 100th change in the main game symbol after the end of the previous special game), the game state shortens the time until the end of the small hit game (or the discharge waiting time has elapsed for the small hit game) May be configured not to end. By configuring in this way, when winning a small hit at the time of the final change, and entering the V winning opening C22 during the subsequent small hit game, the time is reduced for the special game generated based on the pitch. It can be handled as a special game that occurs in a game state.

  It should be noted that the descriptions related to various features of the invention described in the present invention are not limited to the embodiments and modified examples relating to the described portions related to the features, and are applied to any described embodiments and modified examples. There is no problem.

  In this example, the second big winning opening C20 is opened to the V winning opening C22 in the small hit game related to the first main game side rather than in the small hit game related to the second main game side. It may be configured such that it is difficult to enter the ball. Further, it may be configured that the small hit games related to all the first main game small hit symbols are more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side. However, even if the small hit game related to a part of the first main game small hit design is configured such that it is more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side. Good. In addition, when the small hit game related to a part of the first main game small hit design is configured such that it is more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side, The selection rate of the small hit symbol at the time of the small hit on the first main game side is “the first main game small hit that makes it difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game on the second main game side. Symbol selection ratio> First main game small hit symbol (second main game) excluding the first main game small hit symbol which is more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side “Selection rate of the first main game small hit symbol) that makes it easy to enter the V winning opening C22 about the same level as during the small winning game on the game side”, that is, “the difficulty of entering the V winning opening C22” It may be configured such that “selection rate of 1 main game small winning symbol> selection rate of first main game small winning symbol easy to enter the V winning opening C22”.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize opening C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
Second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, V prize C22). (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50), and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit, for example) according to the determination content based on a second random number related to a certain second hold. When the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), the second identification information is configured to be substantially deterministic to be stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variability display. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the executed variable winning opening releasing game is executed. Is configured to make the ball entering the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) substantially deterministic,
Under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) continues, the second special game is newly executed during the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained. Until the predetermined number is reached, a new second hold can be generated before the game ball is continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20). Even under circumstances, during the period in which the normal gaming state is maintained, the new second hold is configured to be impossible or extremely difficult to occur,
When the second special game is executed, the specific game state and the normal game after the execution of the second special game, regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state or the specific game state before the execution of the second special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to sort out which of the states will be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize opening C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
In accordance with the determination content based on the first random number, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
Control the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) according to the determination content based on the second random number. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
Second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, V prize C22). (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50), and
When the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variability display. Is configured so as to be substantially deterministic, and the variable prize opening opening game is performed in a situation where continuous launch of game balls toward the variable prize opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) continues. When executed, it is configured such that the entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) based on the executed variable winning opening opening game is substantially definite.
When the second identification information change unit is the second identification information change unit from the start of change display to the stop display of the second identification information, when the second identification information change unit is performed once in the specific gaming state, On the other hand, if the first identification information variation unit is the first identification information variation unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display, the first identification information variation unit is performed once in the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the specific gaming state is maintained thereafter.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize opening C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
Second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, V prize C22). (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50), and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit, for example) according to the determination content based on a second random number related to a certain second hold. When the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), the second identification information is configured to be substantially deterministic to be stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variability display. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the executed variable winning opening releasing game is executed. Is configured to make the ball entering the specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) substantially deterministic,
When the total display period related to the variable display period of the second identification information during the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained is the first total period, and the change in the second identification information during the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained The total display period related to the display period is configured to be at least a second total period longer than the first total period.
The second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port in the first total period under the situation where the continuous launch of the game ball toward the variable winning port (for example, the second big winning port C20) continues. B2) in the second total period under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, rather than the expected number of balls entering B10). The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the expected number of balls entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is larger.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A first variable member attached to a second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state. The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) or can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A first variable member (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured such that the game ball is not able to enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V prize opening C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
Second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, V prize C22). (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the first variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the first variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric motor is more powerful than the normal game state and the normal game state). A game state transition control means (for example, a control unit B11d) having a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state, and controlling so that the specific game state can be obtained after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed. Specific game control means MP50),
A second variable member that is displaceable between an open state and a closed state (for example, the second type non-electrically acting accessory B12);
A region through which a game ball can pass, and a displacement trigger region (for example, the second main game start) that is a trigger for displacing the second variable member (for example, the second type non-electric accessory B12) from the closed state to the open state. Mouth B10)
During the period in which the normal gaming state is maintained, the gaming ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass through the displacement trigger area (for example, the second main game starting port B10), while the specific gaming state is maintained. Is configured such that a game ball can pass through or easily pass through a displacement trigger area (for example, the second main game start opening B10),
A pachinko that is configured to acquire the second random number when a game ball enters a second variable member in an open state (for example, the second type non-electrical accessory B12). It is a gaming machine.
It should be noted that “trigger” for displacing from the closed state to the open state is (1) passing through a region (for example, entering a power entrance that does not acquire a second random number) The non-electrically-powered object A (for example, the one corresponding to the “first variable member” configured as a non-electrically-powered object) is opened, and the non-electric-powered object A is triggered by the entry into the non-electric-powered object A. The accessory B (for example, the one corresponding to the “second variable member” configured as a non-electric accessory) is opened (indirect opportunity 1), (2) passing through the region (for example, configured as an electric accessory) In addition, the entry into the entrance corresponding to the above-mentioned “first variable member” is a non-electric accessory A (for example, an entry into the non-electric accessory and a second random number is not obtained) Sphere) is opened, and when it enters the non-electrically-powered object A, the non-electrically-charged object B (for example, a non-electrically-charged object is designated as Open the configured “second variable member” (indirect opportunity 2), (3) pass through the area (for example, enter the electric accessory and do not acquire the second random number) A non-electric accessory B (for example, the above-mentioned “second” configured as a non-electric accessory by entering the entrance into the entrance or entering the “first variable member” configured as an electric accessory) The variable member ") may be opened (directly triggered).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (5)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
When a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, the V prize entry ball detection device C22s), a second special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50),
Game information transmission means (for example, game information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary game unit side;
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device, for example) according to the determination content based on a second random number related to a certain second hold. When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), it is configured that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner after the variability display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the executed variable winning opening releasing game is executed. The entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning entry entrance detection device C22s) is configured to be substantially definite,
Under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) continues, the second special game is newly executed during the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained. Until the predetermined number is reached, a new second hold can be generated before the game ball is continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20). Even under circumstances, during the period in which the normal gaming state is maintained, the new second hold is configured to be impossible or extremely difficult to occur,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
During the execution of a certain second special game, a first effect is executed in which a specific game state or a normal game state is notified after the execution of the certain second special game, and then the certain second special game is executed. If the second special game is executed due to the fulfillment of the variable display start condition of the second identification information relating to the second hold remaining during the execution of the second special During the execution of the game, it is possible to execute a second effect for notifying whether the specific game state or the normal game state is to be performed after the execution of the further second special game. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the effect display contents of the second effect are the effect display contents constituting a series of stories.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
In accordance with the determination content based on the first random number, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
Control the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) according to the determination content based on the second random number. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
When a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, the V prize entry ball detection device C22s), a second special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50), and
The unit from the start of change display to the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a unit, and when the player is in a specific game state, the one unit is predetermined without being executed. It is configured to be in a normal gaming state when played a number of times,
A pachinko gaming machine configured so that the number of times set as the predetermined number of times can be changed when the first special game and / or the second special game is executed after completion of execution. .

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
When a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, the V prize entry ball detection device C22s), a second special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50), and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the game ball is continuously fired toward the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d). When the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is in the open state in the normal game state, the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) in the open state. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be able to take a special open state in which a plurality of game balls can enter.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
When a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, the V prize entry ball detection device C22s), a second special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50), and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device, for example) according to the determination content based on a second random number related to a certain second hold. When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), it is configured that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner after the variability display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the executed variable winning opening releasing game is executed. The entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning entry entrance detection device C22s) is configured to be substantially definite,
When the second hold is less than the specific number, the variation display time of the second identification information is at least one of the first variation display time and the second variation display time longer than the first variation display time. On the other hand, the variation display time of the second identification information when the second hold is equal to or more than the specific number is configured to take a variation display time longer than the first variation display time,
During the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained, the game ball is continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20), within the second variable display time or the second One or a plurality of game balls can enter the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) within the variable display time of the second identification information in the case where the second hold is equal to or more than the specific number. This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured as described above.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can enter,
A specific entrance where a game ball can enter (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10),
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
When a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered in the specific area (for example, the V prize entry ball detection device C22s), the right to shift to the second special game that is advantageous to the player is given. A second special game state transition right granting means (for example, special game control means MP30) to be granted;
After the right to transition to the second special game is granted, the second special game that executes the second special game when the game ball enters the specific entrance (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10). Control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50), and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device, for example) according to the determination content based on a second random number related to a certain second hold. When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), it is configured that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner after the variability display, and is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is continued, the executed variable winning opening releasing game is executed. The entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning entry entrance detection device C22s) is configured to be substantially definite,
When the right to transition to the second special game is granted, the right to transition to the second special game is granted until the game ball enters the specific entrance (for example, the auxiliary game start opening H10). When the execution of the second special game is waited without exercising, and the game ball subsequently enters the specific entrance (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10), the assigned second special game is entered. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to start the execution of the second special game by exercising the right to transfer.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, the V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
In accordance with the determination content based on the first random number, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
First special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
Control the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) according to the determination content based on the second random number. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the variable prize opening opening game control for executing the variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening (for example, the second large prize opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40);
When a variable prize opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area (for example, the V prize entry ball detection device C22s), a second special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. Game state transition control means (e.g., specific game control means) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50),
Game information transmitting means (for example, game information transmission control) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game part (for example, sub control board S) Means MT),
The unit from the start of change display to the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a unit, and when the player is in a specific game state, the one unit is predetermined without being executed. It is configured to be in a normal gaming state when played a number of times,
In the case of setting the specific game state after the execution of the first special game and / or the second special game, the number of times set as the predetermined number of times is configured to be variable,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
If execution of the variable prize opening game is scheduled during the period in which the specific game state is maintained, it is scheduled after the execution of the second special game based on the scheduled variable prize opening game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to notify the number of times in advance.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, there is a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or a predetermined time has elapsed. First special game capable of executing a first special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times until a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player. Control means (for example, special game control means MP30);
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol, for example) is determined according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, there is a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or a predetermined time has elapsed. A second special game in which a second special game can be executed in which a unit game is executed once until a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player. Second special game control means for executing (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric player B11d) than the normal game state and the normal game state. A game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a specific game state after completion of execution of the first special game.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit, for example) according to the determination content based on a second random number related to a certain second hold. When the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), the second identification information is configured to be substantially definitive after the variability display and stopped in the specific mode.
When there are a plurality of second holds and the second special game is executed a plurality of times in response to satisfying the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to the plurality of second holds, When the game balls are continuously fired from the start of the execution of the second special game, until the end of the execution of the second special game, which is the final round, The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the total number related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of two special games is increased.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entrance judgment means, MJ11-A first main game start entrance entrance judgment means MJ11-B second main game start entrance entrance judgment means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entrance Ball entrance entry judging means MJ11-C10 1st grand prize entrance entrance judging means, MJ11-C20 2nd grand prize entrance entrance judging means MJ11-V V prize entrance entrance judging means, MJ20 random number acquisition judgment executing means MJ21- A 1st main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H Auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 Hold control means MJ31 Hold digestion control means, MJ31j Fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination Means MJ32 Symbol hold means, MJ32-A First main game symbol hold means MJ32b-A First main game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MJ32-B Second Game symbol holding means MJ32b-B Second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN Game content determination means MN10 Winning lottery means, MN11- A 1st main game winning / failing lottery means MN11ta-A 1st main game winning / losing lottery table, MN11-B 2nd main game winning / failing lottery means MN11ta-B 2nd main game winning / failing lottery table, MN11-H Auxiliary game winning / losing lottery means MN11ta-H auxiliary game success / failure lottery table, MN20 special game transition determining means MN30 variable fixed control means, MN30t variable fixed time timer MN40 symbol content determining means, MN41-A first main game symbol determining means MN41ta-A first main game Symbol determination lottery table, MN41-B second main game symbol determination means MN 41ta-B second main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table, MN50 variation mode determination unit MN51-A first main game variation mode determination unit, MN51ta -A First main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-B Second main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN60 sorting role control means, MN60b sorting role related information temporary storage means MN60t sorting role actuating timer, MP game progress means MP10 display control means, MP11-C first and second 2 main game symbol control means MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11 H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B Second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP21-B Second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means, MP22t -B 2nd main game start opening electric accessory release timer MP30 special game control means, MP31 condition determination means MP32 special game content determination means, MP32ta special game content reference table MP33 special game execution means, MP33-C first and second Large winning opening electric accessory opening and closing control means MP33c winning ball counter, MP34 special game time management means MP34t special game timer, MP40 small hit game control means MP41t small hit game timer, MP41t-2 discharge waiting timer MP40b small hit game related Temporary information storage means, MP50 specific game control means MP52 Case determination means, MP52c short-time counter MB game state temporary storage means, MB10-C first / second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C first / second main game symbol information temporary storage means, MB10-H auxiliary game State temporary storage means MB11b-H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means, MT information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH Prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entrance detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display part, A21h 1st main game symbol hold Display unit B second main game peripheral device, B10 second main game start port B11s second main game start port entrance detection device, B11d Second main game start opening electric accessory B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game symbol display unit B21h Second main game symbol hold display unit, C First and second main game shared peripheral device C10 First Grand prize opening, C11s 1st big prize opening prize detection device C11d First big prize opening electric machine, C20 2nd big prize opening C21s Second big prize opening prize detection device, C21d 2nd big prize opening electric machine C22 V Winning entrance, C22sV winning entrance entrance detection device C23 Distribution role, H Auxiliary game peripheral device H10 Auxiliary game start entrance, H11s Auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device, H21g Auxiliary game symbol display portion H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit, S sub control board SM effect display control means (sub main control board), SM10 display information receiving means SM11b main side information temporary storage means, SM2 Production display control means SM21 Decoration design display control means, SM21n Drawing display content determination means SM21ta Drawing variation content determination lottery table, SM21b Drawing related information temporary storage means SM21t Drawing fluctuation time management timer, SM22 Drawing hold information display Control means SM22b Drawing hold information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect Related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determination means, SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM26 Right-handed instruction display control means, SM27 V winning detection detection display control means SM40 Information transmission / reception Control means, SS effect display means (Savusavu control unit)
SS10 sub information transmission / reception control means, SS20 image display control means SS21b image display related information temporary storage means, SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decoration symbol display area SG12 first reserved display section, SG13 second reserved display section KH Prize ball Dispensing control board, KE prize ball dispensing device

Claims (1)

A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs. First random number temporary storage means;
When the change display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information is changed in the first identification information display unit according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the first identification information after the display,
First special game control means for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second starting port;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the second hold occurs. Second random number temporary storage means;
When the change display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information is changed in the second identification information display unit according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after being displayed;
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, variable prize opening opening game control means for executing a variable prize opening opening game that can change the variable prize opening from the closed state to the open state;
A second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when a variable winning opening game is executed and a ball is entered into the specific area;
The game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be open than in the normal game state, and after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed. In game state transition control means for controlling so that it can be a specific game state,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the second hold. In such a case, it is configured so that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner after the change display, and the continuous launch of the game ball toward the variable winning opening is continued. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the circumstances, the ball entering the specific area based on the executed variable winning opening release game is configured to be substantially definite,
Under the situation where the continuous launch of game balls toward the variable winning opening continues, the predetermined number is reached until the second special game is newly executed while the specific game state is maintained. While a new second hold can be made until the game is in progress, even if the game ball is continuously fired toward the variable prize opening, The new second hold is configured to be incapable or extremely difficult to occur,
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
During the execution of a certain second special game, a first effect is executed in which a specific game state or a normal game state is notified after the execution of the certain second special game, and then the certain second special game is executed. If the second special game is executed due to the fulfillment of the variable display start condition of the second identification information relating to the second hold remaining during the execution of the second special During the execution of the game, it is possible to execute a second effect for notifying whether the specific game state or the normal game state is to be performed after the execution of the further second special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the effect display content of the second effect is the effect display content constituting a series of stories.

Images